JP6833002B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine having the above configuration, a game machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed. Further, in addition to the conventional AT function, a function that activates a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") is provided. A game machine to be equipped is also being developed.

Further, conventionally, among game machines having an AT function, a game machine that enables AT to be stocked during the AT game period is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when AT is stocked during the AT game period, the non-AT game is digested for a predetermined period after the game period of the currently operating AT ends, and then stocked. The AT game is started. That is, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, when the AT is stocked during the AT game period, the AT game is performed again after the so-called "incubation period" after the end of the game period of the currently operating AT. It will be started. In Patent Document 1, the number of unit games during the incubation period is determined by lottery.

JP 2015-165945

As described above, conventionally, there are known game machines that provide a non-AT incubation period between AT sets when the AT set is continued. However, in a configuration in which the game during the non-AT incubation period is always digested each time the AT set is continued, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to prevent a player's interest in playing a game in a gaming machine in which a non-AT incubation period can be set between sets of ATs. It is to be.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A notification means for notifying information about the game (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
It is provided with a notification game determining means (for example, ART lottery processing described later) capable of determining a transition to a notification game (for example, an ART game described later) in which notification by the notification means is executed.
When the transition to the next notification game is determined by the notification game determining means and the notification game is performed a plurality of times, information advantageous to the player is not notified between the current notification game and the next notification game. A non-notifying game (for example, a normal game described later) can be executed (for example, an ART latent lottery process described later (S548 during processing at the start of the ART set)).
A specific notification game (for example, the ending ART described later) for executing a predetermined effect over a specific period (for example, 50 games described later) is provided.
The specific notification game ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied without extending the specific notification game.
When it is decided to execute the specific notified game, the non-notified game is not executed until the specific notified game is completed.
A special game (for example, an FC game described later), which is a game different from the notification game and is advantageous for the player, is provided.
During said special game, Ri extension determinable der gaming period of the special game,
A plurality of modes in the special game are provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the internal winning combination that can determine both the gaming period of the notified game and the extension of the gaming period of the special game is different depending on the mode.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the mode of multiple the probability of extension of the game period of the special game is determined contain relatively high predetermined mode,
Wherein in a predetermined mode, if the extension of the game period of the special game is determined, the long extended period benefits may be Ru grantable der.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, even if the gaming machine can set the incubation period of the non-notifying game (non-AT) between the sets of the notified game (AT), the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the main gaming state of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 1) for RT0 (general) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 2) for RT0 (general) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 3) for RT0 (general) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 1) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (2) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which summarized the type of the game lock which can be executed at the time of lever-on in one Embodiment of this invention, and the operation outline thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (at the time of overlapping winning of a rare combination and 7 matching BB combination) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (at the time of single winning of premium BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (at the time of overlapping winning of middle che and premium BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock mode transition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the replay specified number of times lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area (internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition flow of the sub-game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the game flow before and after the ending ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table of the push order navigation generated in the game in the ART preparation state in one embodiment of the present invention, and the internal winning combination. It is a correspondence table of the sub-game state and the sub-control flag in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a correspondence table between the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the sub CPU and the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the liquid crystal sub reel in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the liquid crystal symbols displayed by the liquid crystal sub reel in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the production effective line of the liquid crystal sub reel in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence between the combination of the liquid crystal symbols displayed on the production effective line in the liquid crystal sub reel of one Embodiment of this invention, and the winning combination name used on the sub CPU side. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the continuous hitting effect during FC game executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the continuous hitting effect during FC game executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the continuous hitting effect during FC game executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the continuous hitting effect during FC game executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous hitting effect pattern data referred to in the continuous hitting effect during FC game executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the JR effect executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal ART lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal middle loop mode lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FC / addition lottery table in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the loop mode transition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART latent lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the omen game number lottery table at the time of latent in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FC mode lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FC game number addition lottery table (FC mode 1 o'clock) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FC game number addition lottery table (FC mode 2 o'clock) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table (at FC mode 1) in FC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table (FC mode 2 o'clock) in FC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table (FC mode 5 o'clock) in FC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the JR lottery table in 7 sets BB (normal) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the JR lottery table in 7 sets BB (ART) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the JR lottery table in premium BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (when JR succeeds) in 7 sets BB (normal) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of 7 sets BB (normal) middle loop mode lottery table (when JR succeeds) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table in 7 sets BB (ART) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table in premium BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the example of the power-on processing executed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART start signal output processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock-related lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the replay specified number of times update processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing after the second stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART entry mode selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in FC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ART set start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect set processing in FC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ART set end processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in the ending ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in 16th ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the additional stock release pretreatment in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing during addition stock discharge in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the end of the 16th ART set in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the additional stock discharge start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART preparation process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART latent processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of JR success in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a bonus end command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table (at the time of FC mode 1) in FC in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition flow of the sub-game state in the modification 2.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which AT and RT operate at the same time will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. In addition, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, image display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof. Various productions are performed using.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a main reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that the carrier can handle when transporting the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (variable display means) are arranged in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each main reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The frame member 13 has a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening of the frame member 13, and the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided in the lower part of the opening of the frame member 13.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Reel. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R arranged behind the display window (cabinet 2a side) are transparent and visible. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each main reel when the rotation of the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. The three symbols are configured to be displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is set in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each main reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (in total). 3) is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is formed. It is defined as an effective line for judging whether or not a prize is won.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided at the lower part of the reel display window 4, and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a structure that cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b.

Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 facing the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, a seat member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as a mounting portion for the information sheet.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 is not removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that access the inside of the pachislot machine 1 via. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG. 4 described later.

In the present embodiment, as described above, an example in which the information display window 14 is continuously formed with the reel display window 4 at the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is composed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is provided so that a substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). On the substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15, three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R each pass are provided side by side.

The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding main reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. In the following, the three stop buttons 19L, 19C and 19R will also be referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

In addition to the stop button, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 20, a MAX bet button 21, a 1-bet button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 20 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done. That is, the pachislot machine 1 has a so-called credit function.

The MAX bet button 21 and the 1-bet button 22 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the main reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The MAX bet button 21 also acts as a determination button when determining the effect content selected by the player's selection operation at the time of a predetermined effect.

Further, when viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Display digitally. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game playability is required. For example, the selection button 25 is pressed when the player selects the rush mode to ART in the BB game described later. The selection button 25 is connected to the sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 detects the pressing of the selection button 25 and controls the selection operation based on the detection.

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b, respectively. Each side panel unit has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medal discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound effects and sounds such as music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 and 4 are views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting a sound effect is provided.

A cabinet-side relay board 44 is arranged on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). This is a relay board for electrically connecting the medal payout count switch (not shown) and the medal payout count switch (not shown).

An amplifier board 45 for controlling the sound output by the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side portion (right side in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the amplifier board 45 is the outside described later. A centralized terminal plate 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is arranged. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

A hopper device 51 (medal payout device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts electric power having an AC voltage of 100 V into electric power having a DC voltage required for each unit, and supplies the converted electric power to each unit.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side to the front door 2b. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 includes a main control board case 55 in which a main control board 71 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) is housed, and three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It is attached. Further, although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display means) is connected to each of the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

In the present embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b as shown in FIG. As described above, an information sheet on which information about the game is described is arranged between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17. The window. Also, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

An auxiliary control board case 57 in which the auxiliary control board 72 (see FIG. 5 described later), which will be described later, is housed is arranged above the middle door 41 of the front door 2b. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 has a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side, the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later is arranged on the right side of the sub-control board case 57. The sub-relay board 61 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub-control board 72 and the boards provided around the sub-control board 72. Examples of the substrate arranged around the sub-control substrate 72 include LED substrates 62A and 62B, which will be described later.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED substrates 62A and 62B are provided above the sub-control substrate case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. The LED substrates 62A and 62B cause the LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 85 (see FIG. 5 described later) to emit light in response to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). , Display blinking pattern. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 described later is arranged below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are arranged above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of various buttons and switches include MAX bet button 21, 1 bet button 22, settlement button 27, door open / close monitoring switch 67, selection switch 76 described later, BET switch 77, start switch 79, and the like. it can.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each main reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each main reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachislot 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a selection switch 76 (chance switch), which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and an auxiliary relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The selection switch 76 detects that the selection button 25 has been pressed by the player. The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1-bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24 and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying the game. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. Further, an LED 82 is connected to the game operation display board 81, and the LED 82 lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, or the like based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81, for example. ..

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the LED substrates 62A and 62B and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 85), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each main reel (mainly, how many symbols the main reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the main reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each main reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit due to rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each main reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each main reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each main reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration for extracting a random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Includes various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a lower speaker 65L. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the sound output by the 65R are also included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 outputs a sound such as BGM by a group of speakers such as the lower speakers 65L and 65R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 42. In the following, for convenience of explanation, when explaining the data table, characteristic functions and features related to the data table will be appropriately described.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 8). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each main reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each main reel, "0" corresponding to the symbol counter is used in the order of the reel rotation direction (the direction from the symbol position "19" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 8) with reference to the symbol position "0". "" To "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, the values are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each main reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the reel display window 4 have the symbol position "9", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "Blank 2", "Replay" at symbol position "8", and "Bell" at symbol position "7" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. Here, in order to clarify the structure of the symbol combination table (to make it easier to see), the symbol combination table is divided into three tables of FIGS. 9 to 11, but in reality, FIGS. 9 to 11 are shown. The three tables of 11 are configured as one table.

The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of privilege (bonus, small combination, replay), and the contents (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display combination code. Define the correspondence with the number of sheets.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the symbol combinations specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "loss" is specified by not specifying the symbol combination corresponding to "loss" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "missing" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify the "missing" symbol combination.

The various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination code column is data for designating the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In this embodiment, 18 symbol code storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to differences in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the symbol combination in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_BEL_M9_01" (bell) is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination related to "C_BEL_M9_01" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If so, 9 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_REP_R_01" (re-game) is determined (when the symbol combination related to "C_REP_R_01" is stopped and displayed on the valid line), the replay is performed. Works. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_BB_02" (same color BB) (when the symbol combination related to "C_BB_02" is stopped and displayed on the effective line) is determined, the BB described later will be described. (Big bonus) is activated.

In addition, the display combination related to the combination names "R_HAZ_01" to "R_HAZ_16" in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 9 to 11 could not stop and display the symbol combination of the small combination related to "bell" on the effective line (missed). It is a role that is displayed at the time. Further, in the present embodiment, this combination serves as a transition combination (“bell transition” in FIG. 13) that serves as an opportunity for the RT gaming state to shift to the RT1 gaming state.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. When the bonus is activated, the bonus activation table is stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 44 described later), the bonus end number counter, the game possible count counter, and the winning count counter provided in the main RAM 95. Specify the data to be used.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in which the operation is performed. In the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as "RB") are provided as the types of bonus games. The BB is an accessory continuous operation device related to the RB called a type 1 special accessory, and continuously operates the RB. Further, in the present embodiment, nine types of BBs (BBs related to the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") are provided. In the present embodiment, the BBs related to the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09" are managed by the same game state flag (see FIG. 44 described later), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination name "C_BB_01" is used. "C_BB_09" may be given an individual game status flag to each of the BBs.

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operation of the BB, which is started when the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_BB_01” is displayed, ends when the number of medals exceeding the specified number “297” is paid out. In addition, the operation of the BB, which is started when the symbol combination related to any of the combination names "C_BB_02" to "C_BB_09" is displayed, ends when the number of medals exceeding the specified number "144" is paid out. To do.

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of the RB, that is, the so-called playable number of times. The operation of the RB ends when eight games have been played. The winning count counter is data for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed in the operation of the RB, that is, the so-called winning count. In the present embodiment, the number of times the RB can win a prize is eight times.

[RT transition table]
(1) Transition Flow of Main Game State Before explaining the configuration of the RT transition table, the types of game states managed and transition-controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) and the outline of the transition operation will be described.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as RT game states, five types of states called "RT0 game state" to "RT4 game state" in which the winning probabilities of replays are different from each other are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state at the time of BB operation (hereinafter, referred to as “BB gaming state”) is also managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93). In the following, these gaming states managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) are referred to as "main gaming states". Further, the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, which are the main gaming states when the BB is not activated, are also collectively referred to as "general gaming states".

In the present embodiment, as shown in various internal lottery tables for general game states (see FIGS. 16 to 22) described later, the winning probability (medium probability) of the re-game in the RT4 game state is the RT0 game state and the RT1 game. It is higher than that of the state and the RT3 gaming state (low probability), and lower than that of the RT2 gaming state (high probability). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be hung for each unit game in the main game state is three.

Here, various main game states managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIG.

At the initial state, at the end of BB, when the "irregular 1-card combination" is won in the RT1 and RT2 game states, or when the "RT0 transition lip" is won in the RT1 game state, as shown in FIG. 13, the main game The state shifts to the RT0 gaming state (low RT gaming state). It should be noted that the time when the "RT0 transition lip" is won is when the replay role (see FIG. 9) related to the combination name "C_REP_RT0" is won, and the time when the "irregular one piece role" is won is the combination name "C_BEL_H_01" ~. This is when the small winning combination (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which the number of medals paid out is one among the small winning combinations of "C_BEL_H_32" is won.

In the RT0 gaming state, when the "bell transition" is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (low RT gaming state). When the "bell transition" is displayed, the symbol combination (bell spill: see FIG. 11) related to any of the combination names "R_HAZ_01" to "R_HAZ_16" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the main reel. It was when it was done.

In the RT1 game state, when the "RT2 transition lip" is won, the RT game state shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state (high RT game state). The "RT2 transition lip" winning is when the replay combination (see FIG. 9) related to the combination name "C_REP_RT2" wins.

In the RT2 gaming state, when the "bell transition" is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

In the RT0, RT1 or RT2 game state, when any of the bonus combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as "BB role") of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_05" is won, the RT game state is the RT0, RT1 or RT2 game state. To the RT3 gaming state (low RT gaming state). Further, in the RT0, RT1 or RT2 gaming state, when any BB combination of the combination names "C_BB_06" to "C_BB_09" is won, the RT gaming state changes from the RT0, RT1 or RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (medium RT gaming). State).

In the RT3 or RT4 gaming state, when the operation of the internally winning BB is started, the main gaming state shifts to the BB gaming state. That is, the RT3 and RT4 gaming states are states in which the BB is internally won (BB carry-over state). Further, when the operation of the BB is completed, the main gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

(2) Configuration of RT Transition Table Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table is a table that defines the transition conditions of the transition flow between the RT game states (main game states) described with reference to FIG. 13, and specifically, the activation conditions and end conditions of each RT game state are defined. To do.

Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition operation between the RT0 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state and the transition operation between the general gaming state and the BB gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. (See the RT control process of FIG. 104 described later).

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the main game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table to be referred to, and the number of lottery.

Specifically, when the main gaming state is the general gaming state (BB not activated), any one of the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table to the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, which will be described later, is based on the type of the RT gaming state. Is used, and "98" is set as the number of lottery. When the main game state is the BB (RB) game state, the internal lottery table for the RB game state described later is used, and "1" is set as the number of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, various internal lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 23. The internal lottery table corresponds to the winning number, the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning number, and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each main game state. Define the relationship.

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are described later in the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 27 described later). This is the data for designating the internal winning combination specified by.

In the internal lottery process using the internal lottery table in the present embodiment, the random number values extracted from the predetermined numerical value range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values specified according to each winning number. To do. Further, in each of the subtraction processes, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which the lottery value is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value associated with each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) Internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (for general gaming state) FIGS. 16 to 18 show an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (to make it easier to see), the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state is divided into three tables shown in FIGS. 16 to 18. Actually, the three tables of FIGS. 16 to 18 are configured as one table.

The internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, and the winning numbers "1" to "98", and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to each winning number. The correspondence with is specified. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is separately defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided for the game store to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small wins. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch 56 are used. Be changed.

Further, in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state, a lottery value larger than 0 is set for the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") and "9" (abbreviation "F_chance lip"). Although specified, the lottery value of the winning numbers "2" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 2") to "8" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_321") is 0. That is, in the RT0 game state, the replay combination related to the winning numbers "1" and "9" can be won, but the replay combination related to the winning numbers "2" to "8" is not won (winning numbers "2" to "8"). The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer corresponding to "8" are not acquired).

In the internal lottery with reference to the RT0 gaming state internal lottery table, for example, the probability that the winning number "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") will be won at the setting of 6 is 8580/65536. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer "1" corresponds to the internal winning combination related to the combination names "C_REP_R_01" to "C_REP_R_13" (see FIG. 25 described later).

Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state, for example, the probability that the winning number "9" (abbreviated as "F_chance lip") is won at the setting of 6 is 400/65536. Then, when the winning number "9" is won, "9" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer "9" corresponds to the internal winning combination related to the combination names "C_REP_R_01" to "C_REP_R_13" and "C_REP_RT0" (see FIG. 25 described later).

The internal winning combination related to the abbreviation "F_chance lip" is an internal winning combination called "chance eye", but in the present embodiment, the internal winning combination related to another chance item called "cycle chance eye". Is also provided.

As will be described later, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is abbreviated as "F_normal lip 1" in the game after the initial state, after the lock occurs at the start of the previous game, or after the previous "rare role" win. -The number of winnings of the replay combination (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal replay combination") related to any one of "F_normal lip 4" and "F_RT2 transition lip_213" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined by lottery or the like. When the specified number of times (hereinafter referred to as "the specified number of replays") is reached, it is assumed that the cycle chance is internally won. Then, when the cycle chance eye is internally won, the normal replay combination that is internally won at the specified number of replays is treated as the internal winning combination of the chance eye. In this case, as will be described later, there is a high probability that the ART will be won by the ART lottery.

Then, at the time of the internal winning of the cycle chance, as will be described later, a lock (the second game lock described later) is generated at the start of the game (when the lever is turned on). Further, at the time of winning the cycle chance, in the production using the liquid crystal sub reel (see FIG. 53 described later) performed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the abbreviation "F_chance" is used instead of the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the normal replay combination. Similar to the case of winning the chance eye related to "Rip", the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line for the production of the liquid crystal sub reel described later.

It should be noted that the counting process of the number of winnings of the normal replay combination is performed in the RT0 to RT2 gaming states, and is not performed in the RT3 and RT4 gaming states and the BB gaming state. Therefore, the lock at the start of the game triggered by the cycle chance hit is generated in the RT0 to RT2 game states.

Further, the "rare role" referred to in the present embodiment is abbreviated as "F_chance lip", "F_weak watermelon", "F_strong watermelon" among various internal winning roles in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 to 18. , "F_weak che", "F_strong che", and "F_medium che".

(2) Internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, and the winning numbers "1" to "9", and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to each winning number. The correspondence with is specified.

When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 16) are the RT1 gaming states. It is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers "10" to "98" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

Further, in the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state, a lottery value larger than 0 is set for the winning numbers "5" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_213") to "9" (abbreviation "F_chance lip"). Although specified, the lottery value of the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") is 0. That is, in the RT1 game state, the replay combination related to the winning numbers "5" to "9" can be won, but the replay combination related to the winning numbers "1" to "4" is not won (winning numbers "1" to "4"). The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer corresponding to "4" are not acquired).

In the internal lottery with reference to the RT1 game state internal lottery table, for example, at 6 o'clock, any of the winning numbers "5" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_213") to "8" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_321") The probability of winning is 2145/65536. Then, for example, when the winning number "5" is won, "5" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer "5" corresponds to the internal winning combination related to the combination names "C_REP_R_01" to "C_REP_R_13", "C_REP_RT0" and "C_REP_RT2" (see FIG. 25 described later). Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state, for example, the probability that the winning number "9" (abbreviated as "F_chance lip") is won at the setting of 6 is 400/65536.

(3) Internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, and the winning numbers "1" to "9", and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to each winning number. The correspondence with is specified.

When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 16) are the RT2 gaming states. It is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers "10" to "98" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the RT2 game state internal lottery table, for winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") and "9" (abbreviation "F_chance lip") Although a lottery value larger than 0 is specified, the lottery value of the winning numbers "5" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_213") to "8" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_321") is 0. is there. That is, in the RT2 game state, the replay combination related to the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "9" can be won, but the replay combination related to the winning numbers "5" to "8" is not won (winning number). The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer corresponding to "5" to "8" are not acquired).

In the internal lottery with reference to the RT2 game state internal lottery table, for example, at the time of setting 6, any one of the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") The probability of winning is 11603/65536. Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RT2 game state, for example, the probability that the winning number "9" (abbreviated as "F_chance lip") is won at the setting of 6 is 400/65536.

(4) Internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, and the winning numbers "1" to "9", and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to each winning number. The correspondence with is specified.

When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 16) are the RT3 gaming states. It is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers "10" to "40" related to the small winning combination in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used. However, since the RT3 state is the RT gaming state (BB carry-over state) that occurs during the period from the time of winning the BB to the start of the BB operation, the winning number related to the bonus combination (BB combination) in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. The lottery values of "41" to "98" are set to 0 (non-winning).

In the RT3 game state internal lottery table, for winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") and "9" (abbreviation "F_chance lip") Although a lottery value larger than 0 is specified, the lottery value of the winning numbers "5" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_213") to "8" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_321") is 0. is there. That is, in the RT3 game state, the replay combination related to the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "9" can be won, but the replay combination related to the winning numbers "5" to "8" is not won (winning number). The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer corresponding to "5" to "8" are not acquired).

In the internal lottery with reference to the RT3 game state internal lottery table, for example, at setting 6, any one of the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") The probability of winning is 2200/65536. Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RT3 game state, for example, the probability that the winning number "9" (abbreviated as "F_chance lip") is won at the setting of 6 is 180/65536.

(5) Internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, and the winning numbers "1" to "9", and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to each winning number. The correspondence with is specified.

When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery values defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 16) are the RT4 gaming states. It is changed to the lottery value specified for each of the winning numbers "1" to "9" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers "10" to "40" related to the small winning combination in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used. However, since the RT4 state is an RT gaming state (BB carry-over state) that occurs during the period from the time of winning the BB to the start of the BB operation, the winning number related to the bonus combination (BB combination) in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. The lottery values of "41" to "98" are set to 0 (non-winning).

In the RT4 game state internal lottery table, for winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") and "9" (abbreviation "F_chance lip") Although a lottery value larger than 0 is specified, the lottery value of the winning numbers "5" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_213") to "8" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip_321") is 0. is there. That is, in the RT4 game state, the replay combination related to the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "9" can be won, but the replay combination related to the winning numbers "5" to "8" is not won (winning number). The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer corresponding to "5" to "8" are not acquired).

In the internal lottery with reference to the RT4 game state internal lottery table, for example, at 6 o'clock setting, any one of the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 1") to "4" (abbreviation "F_normal lip 4") The probability of winning is 5400/65536. Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RT4 game state, for example, the probability that the winning number "9" (abbreviated as "F_chance lip") is won at the setting of 6 is 245/65536.

(6) Internal lottery table for RB FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for RB. The internal lottery table for RB is referred to when the main gaming state is the BB (RB) gaming state. The internal lottery table for RB defines the correspondence between the winning number "1" and the lottery value and the data pointer assigned to the winning number "1".

In the present embodiment, the lottery value of the winning number "1" specified in the internal lottery table for RB is "65536", so that the winning number "1" is always won in the BB game state (RB game state). , The small role / replay data pointer "40" is acquired. The internal winning combination corresponding to the small winning combination / replay data pointer "40" is the internal winning combination of the abbreviation "F_RB combination", and in this internal winning combination, all the small winning combinations are duplicated (see the figure below). 25-5 (see FIG. 27). Therefore, when the main gaming state is the BB (RB) gaming state, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storage area described later are turned on (data “1” is stored in the bit area). ..

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely determined.

The data in the "internal winning combination" column in the internal winning combination determination table is a combination of symbols that allow display along the effective line set over the display areas of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. It is data for identification. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. The "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

When both the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol shown in FIGS. 9 to 11. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by the combination table is not permitted.

(1) Bonus internal winning combination determination table FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for each of "1" to "9" of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when "1" is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the internal winning combination (premium BB described later) related to the combination name "C_BB_01" is won. In addition, when "2" to "5" are acquired as the bonus data pointers, the internal winning combinations (red 7BB described later) related to the combination names "C_BB_02" to "C_BB_05" are each won, and the bonus data. When "6" to "9" are acquired as pointers, the internal winning combinations (blue 7BB described later) related to the combination names "C_BB_06" to "C_BB_09" are each won.

(2) Small win / replay internal winning combination determination table FIGS. 25 to 27 show the small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. Here, in order to clarify the structure of the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay (to make it easier to see), the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay is divided into the three tables shown in FIGS. 25 to 27. Although shown separately, in reality, the three tables of FIGS. 25 to 27 are configured as one table.

The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for each of "1" to "40" of the small combination / replay data pointer. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination (replay combination) related to the combination names "C_REP_R_01" to "C_REP_R_13" is duplicated as the internal winning combination. Further, when "36" is acquired as the data pointer for the small winning combination / replay, the internal winning combination (small winning combination) related to the combination names "C_WML_M4_01" to "C_WML_M4_20" is duplicated as the internal winning combination.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointers (bonus data pointer and small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines different rotation stop numbers for each combination of the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3" and the bonus data pointer is "0", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. Further, for example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" and the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "41" is selected. Further, for example, when the data pointer for small role / replay is "35" and the data pointer for bonus is any of "2" to "9", the rotation stop number "44" is selected. Will be done.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used for the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each main reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the reel stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the display corresponding to the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (not shown). Data on the priority of roles can be acquired.

Although the configuration of the pull-in priority table will not be described in detail here, the pull-in priority table includes the pull-in priority data for each storage area type in each pull-in priority table number and its predetermined priority. It is a table that defines the correspondence with. The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority of the symbol combination related to the winning (replay, small winning combination and bonus) is set in the order of replay, small winning combination and bonus from the highest.

Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 34 described later) is referred to and the pull-in priority is given. Table selection The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

For the forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data, a stop table (see FIGS. 30 to 32 described later) to be referred to when forward-pressed is performed is specified. It is the data for. The "forward push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation of the main reel) is performed on the left reel 3L. Specifically, Corresponds to the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 33 described later) to be referred to when an irregular pressing is performed. The "irregular push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "right middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stop control of the main reel is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding main reel stops within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding main reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position to be used is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the main reel stops (this is referred to as the "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding main reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the main reel is started, and this is called the "stop start position". ..

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the main reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding main reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding main reel in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding main reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each main reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the main reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), the pull-in priority table (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) Change the number of sliding pieces by referring to (not shown). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 30 described later) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 32 described later) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIG. 33 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing shown in FIG. 30 is referred to when the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "19" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "14", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 31 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 30) is "1" and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is "14", the change status is "14". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "19".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 32 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 33 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the main reel of the bits corresponding to the "A line" column and the "B line" in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to the column. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular time specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the main reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the rotation of the main reel is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 19C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is sequentially searched for whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is determined by referring to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it is done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (not shown).

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number. Then, in this case, "00" is maintained as the pull-in priority table number regardless of whether the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is stopped at the second stop.

If the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position in the pull-in priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "0", the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search”). "Order") is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 100 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order “1”. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces that are applied.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the type of the main reel and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each main reel displayed on the effective line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 11).

For example, when the symbol "red BAR" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it is displayed in the storage areas 1 to 18 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (red BAR) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the possible internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47 described later) described later.

[Game lock lottery table]
Before explaining the configuration of various game lock lottery tables, the types of locks for production (hereinafter, referred to as "game locks") controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) will be described.

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing a game lock (reel effect) that invalidates or delays the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, in the present embodiment, the following three types of game locks (first to fourth game locks) are provided.

(1) First game lock function In the first game lock, a specific internal winning combination is won at the start of the game (when the start lever 23 is operated by the player: hereinafter referred to as "lever on"). However, it occurs when the lock lottery is won. For this first game lock, five types of game locks (lock patterns 1 to 5) having different operation patterns are prepared.

In the present embodiment, the first game lock of the lock pattern 1 or 4 is generated when the BB combination (premium BB described later) according to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" is independently won. The first game lock of the lock pattern 2 or 3 may occur when the rare combination and the BB combination according to any of the abbreviations "F_BB_02" to "F_BB_09" are overlapped (simultaneously) won. Further, the game lock of the lock pattern 5 occurs when a small role (one of the rare roles) related to the abbreviation "F_Middle Che" and a BB role related to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" are duplicated.

Further, the lottery process of the first game lock is performed only when the RT game state is the RT1 game state. Then, the first game lock of the lock patterns 1 to 4 is performed in the unit game in which the first game lock is won. On the other hand, the first game lock of the lock pattern 5 is generated when the lever of the next unit game (next game) of the unit game won by the first game lock is turned on. That is, whether or not the first game lock of the lock pattern 5 is generated is determined by the unit game in the RT1 game state, but the first game lock of the lock pattern 5 is generated in the unit game in the RT3 game state.

Hereinafter, the contents of each operation pattern of the first game lock will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37 is a diagram summarizing the outline of five types of first game lock operation patterns (game lock patterns) that may occur when the lever is turned on. The type of the first game lock when the lever is turned on shown in FIG. 37 is determined by a lottery process with reference to the game lock lottery table described later.

In the first game lock of the lock pattern 1, all the main reels are locked (all rotation body lock) for a period of 30566 ms after the lever is turned on, and then all the main reels are normally (when the game lock is not generated) reel acceleration. Performs operation (normal forward rotation of all reels).

In the first game lock of the lock pattern 2, all the main reels are locked for a period of 1000 ms after the lever is turned on, and then all the main reels rotate at a slow speed for a period of 700 ms (all rotations, slow reverse rotation). To do. Then, for a period of 1400 ms, all the main reels are temporarily stopped (all times the cylinder is temporarily stopped), and then all the main reels perform a normal reel acceleration operation.

In the first game lock of the lock pattern 3, all the main reels are locked for a period of 1000 ms after the lever is turned on, and then all the main reels rotate in the reverse direction at a slow speed for a period of 700 ms. Then, for a period of 1400 ms, all main reels are paused, and then for a period of 700 ms, all main reels rotate in reverse at a slow speed. Then, for a period of 2100 ms, all the main reels are paused, after which all the main reels perform a normal reel acceleration operation.

In the first game lock of the lock pattern 4, all the main reels are locked for a period of 1000 ms after the lever is turned on, and then all the main reels rotate in the reverse direction at a slow speed for a period of 700 ms. Then, for a period of 1400 ms, all main reels are paused, and then for a period of 700 ms, all main reels rotate in reverse at a slow speed. Then, for a period of 2100 ms, all main reels are paused, and then for a period of 166 ms, all main reels rotate in reverse at a slow speed. Then, for a period of 30400 ms, all the main reels are paused, after which all the main reels perform a normal reel acceleration operation.

In the first game lock of the lock pattern 5, all the main reels are locked for a period of 30566 ms after the lever is turned on, and then all the main reels perform a normal reel acceleration operation. That is, the lock pattern 5 is the same lock pattern as the lock pattern 1. However, as described above, the game lock of the lock pattern 5 is generated when the lever is turned on in the next unit game of the unit game in which the game lock of the lock pattern 5 is determined to be generated.

(2) Second game lock The second game lock is a game lock that occurs when the lever is turned on, like the first game lock, and when the cycle chance is won at the start of the game (when the lever is turned on) (normal). This is a game lock that always occurs when the number of winnings of the replay combination reaches the specified number of replays described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the counting process of the number of winnings of the normal replay combination that determines the winning / non-winning of the cycle chance is performed in the RT0 to RT2 gaming states, so that the second game lock is also performed. It also occurs in the RT0 to RT2 gaming states.

In the second game lock, after the lever is turned on, all the main reels are locked for a specific period (for example, 30566 ms, etc.), and then all the main reels perform a normal reel acceleration operation. The operation pattern of the second game lock is not limited to this, and the operation pattern (lock time) may be changed according to conditions such as the RT game state at the time of winning the cycle chance. Further, as the operation pattern of the second game lock, not only the pattern of locking for a specific period but also the operation patterns such as the lock patterns 2 to 4 described in the first game lock are applied. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the second game lock is generated when the lever is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the unit game in which the cycle chance is won, the second game lock may be generated at any timing after the first stop operation of the main reel, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. .. Further, for example, the second game lock may be generated at both the timing of turning on the lever, after the first stop operation of the main reel, after the second stop operation, and after the third stop operation.

(3) Third game lock The third game lock is a game lock that always occurs after the third stop operation of the main reel (however, during the BB game state) in the unit game at the time of winning the BB and at the end of the BB operation. Is.

In the third game lock at the time of BB winning (during the BB game state), all the main reels are locked for a period of 10,000 ms after the third stop operation. On the other hand, in the third game lock at the end of the BB operation (during the BB game state), all the main reels are locked for a period of 4500 ms after the third stop operation.

The operation pattern (locking time) of the third game lock is the same regardless of the type of BB combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation pattern (locking time) of the third game lock may be changed according to the type of the BB combination. Further, as the operation pattern of the third game lock, not only the pattern of locking for a predetermined period but also the operation patterns such as the lock patterns 2 to 4 described in the first game lock are applied. May be good.

(4) Fourth Game Lock In the present embodiment, when the "RT2 transition lip" is won in the RT1 game state and the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (however, the BB game in the BB state during ART described later). (Except when the RT game state returns to the RT2 game state through the RT0 and RT1 game states after the end), the ART game is not started immediately after the transition. In this case, after the transition to the RT2 game state, the push order navigation of the normal replay role occurs twice, the correct answer is given to the push order navigation (the player presses the stop button according to the push order navigation), and then The ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 when the (third) normal replay combination is internally won. Then, when the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47, the ART game is started triggered by the output operation.

That is, in the present embodiment, the period from the transition of the RT game state to the RT2 game state until the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 is the preparation period for the ART game. When the RT game state returns to the RT2 game state after passing through the RT0 and RT1 game states after the BB game in the BB state during ART described later, the ART game starts (restarts) immediately after the transition to the RT2 game state. Will be done.

The fourth game lock is a game lock (weight) generated after the third stop of the main reel in the unit game in which the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47. In the fourth game lock, all the main reels are locked for a predetermined period after the third stop operation. Then, in this lock (weight) period, the control on the sub side executes an effect of notifying the start of the ART game. Further, the lock (weight) time of the fourth game lock is appropriately set according to, for example, the content of the notification effect of starting ART.

By providing the fourth game lock function described above, even a game machine in which the ART game is started after the preparation period for the ART game can be appropriately notified to the player of the start of the ART game. ..

(5) Various Game Lock Lottery Tables Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, a game lock lottery table used when determining whether or not the first game lock has been generated will be described. Note that FIG. 38 is a game lock lottery table that is referred to when a rare combination and a BB combination related to any of the abbreviations “F_BB_02” to “F_BB_09” are internally won. FIG. 39 is a game lock lottery table that is referred to when the BB combination (premium BB described later) according to the abbreviation “F_BB_01” is independently won internally. Further, FIG. 40 is a game lock lottery table that is referred to when a small winning combination related to the abbreviation “F_Middle Che” and a BB winning combination related to the abbreviation “F_BB_01” are duplicated and internally won.

Each game lock lottery table defines a correspondence between a lock pattern number (“0” to “5”) indicating the type of the first game lock and a lottery value when each lock pattern number is determined. The lock pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the lock patterns 1 to 5 of the first game lock described above, respectively. Further, the lock pattern number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the first game lock. In this case, the game lock does not occur and the normal reel acceleration operation is executed.

In the game lock lottery process using the game lock lottery table, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each lock pattern number. Further, in each of the subtraction processes, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, the lock pattern number when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the first game lock corresponding to the lock pattern number is generated.

In the game lock lottery process when the rare role and the BB role corresponding to any of the abbreviations "F_BB_02" to "F_BB_09" are duplicated and internally won, the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 38 is referred to, and 1024/65536. There is a probability that the first game lock with the lock pattern number "2" or "3" will win. In the game lock lottery process when the BB combination according to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" is independently won, the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39 is referred to, and the first game lock is always won. At this time, the first game lock with the lock pattern number "1" is won with the probability of 58982/65536, and the first game lock with the lock pattern number "4" is won with the probability of 6554/65536. Further, in the game lock lottery process when the small winning combination related to the abbreviation "F_Middle Che" and the BB winning combination related to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" are duplicated and internally won, the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 40 is referred to, and 100 There is a% chance that the first game lock with lock pattern number "5" will win.

[Lock mode transition lottery table]
In the present embodiment, as described above, when the cycle chance is won, that is, when the number of winnings of the normal replay combination reaches the specified number of replays, the game lock (second game lock) is always released when the lever is turned on. appear. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of lock modes are provided in which the susceptibility to the occurrence of the cycle chance eye, that is, the susceptibility to the occurrence of the second game lock triggered by the cycle chance target is different from each other. There is.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, four types of lock modes called "A", "B", "heaven" and "super heaven" are provided. The order of the lock modes in which the second game lock is likely to occur (cycle chances are likely to occur) is "super heaven", "heaven", "B" and "A", and "super heaven". The second game lock is most likely to occur in the lock mode of.

Next, the lock mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The lock mode transition lottery table currently (this time) shows the correspondence between the lock mode (transition destination) that can be set in the next (next) unit game and the lottery value when each lock mode of the transition destination is determined. It is specified for each lock mode set in the unit game of.

The lock mode transition lottery with reference to the lock mode transition lottery is performed when the occurrence of the first game lock at the time of lever-on is determined in the RT1 game state, or in the RT0 to RT2 game states, a rare role or a cycle chance. This is done when the eyes hit the inside. That is, the lock mode transition lottery process is performed not only when the second game lock is generated triggered by the cycle chance winning, but also when the above-mentioned first game lock is generated or when the rare role is internally won. It is also done.

In the lock mode transition lottery process using the lock mode transition lottery table, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is set as a lottery value defined according to each lock mode of the migration destination. Subtract sequentially with. Further, in each of the subtraction processes, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, the lock mode when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the lock mode becomes the lock mode of the migration destination.

In the lock mode transition lottery process, for example, when the current lock mode is "heaven", the lock mode of "A" or "B" is won with a probability of 13107/65536, and there is a probability of 386667/65536. The "heaven" lock mode wins (no lock mode transition), and the "super heaven" lock mode wins with a probability of 655/65536.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the lock mode transition lottery table is commonly used regardless of the type of the internal winning combination at the time of executing the lock mode transition lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal winning combination is not limited to this. A lock mode transition lottery table may be provided for each type of combination.

[Replay specified number of times lottery table]
In the present embodiment, when the lock mode transition lottery process using the lock mode transition lottery table described above is performed, a cycle chance is performed using the replay specified number of times lottery table based on the lottery result (transition destination lock mode). The eye generation condition, that is, the specified number of replays (the number of winnings of the replay combination) is reset (reset). Therefore, the resetting process of the specified number of replays is performed not only when the second game lock occurs triggered by the cycle chance hit, but also when the above-mentioned first game lock occurs or when a rare role is played. It is also done when the internal winning is done.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first game lock occurs at the time of lever-on or when the rare combination is internally won, the number of winnings of the normal replay combination has not reached the specified number of replays at that time. Also, the lock mode transition lottery process and the replay specified number of lottery processes are performed, and the replay specified number of times (condition for generating the cycle chance) is reset (updated).

When such a second game lock generation control function is provided, the second game lock generation condition triggered by the cycle chance hit is not only when the second game lock occurs, but also when the first game lock occurs. Since it is changed when a game lock occurs or when a rare role is internally won, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing when the second game lock occurs. As a result, in the present embodiment, the lock generation mode becomes more diverse, and the player's interest in the lock function can be enhanced.

Next, the replay specified number of times lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The replay specified number of times lottery table defines the correspondence between various replay specified times and the lottery value when each replay specified number of times is determined for each lottery result (transfer destination lock mode) of the lock mode transition lottery process. To do.

In the lottery process of the specified number of replays using the replay specified number of times lottery table, the random number values extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values specified according to the specified number of replays. To do. Further, in each of the subtraction processes, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, the specified number of replays when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the specified number of replays becomes the condition for generating the cycle chance after the next game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the distribution of the lottery values defined for the various replay specified times (1 to 100 times) is different for each type of lock mode.

Specifically, when the lock mode is "A", the specified number of replays is selected in the range of 5 to 100 times, but the lottery value becomes the largest at 100 times. That is, when the lock mode is "A", the probability that 100 times are set as the specified number of replays (46506/65536) is the highest. Further, when the lock mode is "B", the specified number of replays is selected in the range of 5 to 100 times, but the lottery value becomes the largest at 90 times. That is, when the lock mode is "B", the probability that 90 times are set as the specified number of replays (46506/65536) is the highest.

When the lock mode is "heaven", the specified number of replays is selected in the range of 5 to 30 times, but the lottery value becomes the largest at 5 times. That is, when the lock mode is "heaven", the probability that 5 times are set as the specified number of replays (32768/65536) is the highest. When the lock mode is "super heaven", the specified number of replays is selected in the range of 1 to 10 times, but the lottery value becomes the largest once. That is, when the lock mode is "super heaven", the probability that one is set as the specified number of replays (58986/65536) is the highest.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock mode "A" is a lock mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the second game lock (frequency of occurrence of the cycle chance eye) triggered by the cycle chance hit is the lowest. On the other hand, the lock mode "super heaven" is a lock mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the second game lock triggered by the cycle chance hit is the highest. In particular, when the lock mode is "super heaven", the specified number of replays is set to 1 with a probability of 58986/65536, so it is much easier to win the cycle chance than in other lock modes. , The frequency of occurrence of the second game lock triggered by the cycle chance hit is also very high.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47. Although description is omitted here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various game locks is also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, and carry-over combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 18 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 18, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 43. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 18, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). The carry-over combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 43. As a result of the internal lottery, when the BB combination having any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is changed to the corresponding symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination "red BAR"-"red BAR"-"red BAR" related to the combination name "C_BB_01", and the combination name "C_BB_02". The symbol combination "blue 7"-"blue 7"-"blue 7", the symbol combination "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" related to the combination name "C_BB_03", etc.) are displayed on the valid line. It is retained without being cleared until it reaches. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, BB (BB pertaining to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") is being operated and the game is played. The state is the BB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 19L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2 to 19) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the main reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 19.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 36), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 47. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

<Type of sub-game state and transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type and transition operation of the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “sub-gaming state”) managed and transition-controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102). The outline of is explained.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT function (navigation) is activated when the main gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) has a sub game state in which the ART function is activated (hereinafter, referred to as "ART state") and a sub game state in which the ART function is not activated (hereinafter, "ART state"). "Normal state") is managed.

Further, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) has various effect functions peculiar to the BB game when the main game state is the BB game state. Therefore, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) also manages the sub game state (hereinafter, referred to as “BB state”) at the time of BB operation separately from the normal state and the ART state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when shifting from the BB state to the ART state, the main gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT2 gaming state via the RT0 and RT1 gaming states. Further, except when the RT game state shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state (however, the RT game state returns to the RT2 game state through the RT0 and RT1 game states after the BB game in the BB state during ART described later is completed. ), The period from the transition to the RT2 game state to the output of the ART game start signal to the external centralized terminal board 47 is the preparation period for the ART game.

Then, in the present embodiment, the period of the transition process of the main gaming state from the BB gaming state to the RT2 gaming state described above, and after the transition to the RT2 gaming state until the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47. The corresponding predetermined effect is also executed in the state of the preparation period of the ART game, that is, in the state until the sub-game state shifts from the normal state or the BB state to the ART state. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) also manages the period of the transition process of these main game states and the state of the preparation period of the ART game (hereinafter, referred to as “ART preparation state”).

[Normal state]
The normal state corresponds to RT0 of the main game state or the RT game state (low RT game state).

In the normal state, ART lottery is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, if the ART lottery is won, the sub-game state shifts from the normal state (normal game state) to the ART state (notified game state) via the ART preparation state (transition preparation state).

In addition, in the unit game in the normal state, when the BB combination (internal winning combination related to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") is won and the BB combination wins (the symbol combination related to the BB combination is the main). When the stop is displayed on the effective line of the reel), the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the BB state (special game state).

At this time, the main gaming state shifts to the BB gaming state via the RT3 or RT4 gaming state (BB carry-over state) as described above. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 48, the transition path from the normal state to the BB state also has a BB flag inter-flag state corresponding to the RT3 or RT4 gaming state as a sub-game state.

In the present embodiment, when the continuation of the ART game set is confirmed (winning) (except when the 16th consecutive ART continuation is confirmed, which will be described later), the latent lottery of ART is performed as described later. Then, when the latent lottery of ART is won, the sub-game state is temporarily changed to the normal state (the main game state is the RT1 game state) after the ART of the current set is completed. Next, after the game in the normal state is executed for a predetermined period (the period of the number of latent omen games), the sub-game state returns to the ART state. In the following, a state in which the sub-game state stays in the normal state for a predetermined period (the period of the number of latent precursor games) when the ART is continued is referred to as an "ART latent state".

[ART status]
The ART state corresponds to the RT2 game state (high RT game state) of the main game state.

In one set of game periods in the ART state, ART games (notification games) are mainly performed over a predetermined unit number of games (number of ART games). In addition, during the game period in the ART state, as shown in FIG. 48, a game of an additional special section called "fusion chance" (hereinafter, referred to as "FC game") is also performed.

In the FC game, a game (additional game) in which the number of ART games can be added is performed for a period of at least 5 games. The game period of the FC game is not limited to this example, and can be appropriately changed depending on, for example, the content of the game.

The FC game is always performed at the start of the game period in the ART state (hereinafter, referred to as "at the start of the ART set"). The FC game is also performed when the FC game lottery is won in the ART game during the game period in the ART state (hereinafter, referred to as “the ART set period”). The contents of the ART game, the FC game at the start of the ART set, and the FC game during the ART set period, which are performed during the game period in the ART state, will be described in more detail below.

(1) When the FC game sub-game state at the start of the ART set shifts from the normal state (including the ART latent state) or the normal medium BB state described later to the ART state via the ART preparation state, first, at least 5 games FC games will be played over the period. In the FC game at the start of the ART set, the initial number of ART games (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of ART initial games") played in the game period of one set of ART states is mainly determined.

Specifically, first, in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the FC mode lottery is performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of FC modes (FC modes 1 to 5) are provided in which the number of ART games that can be added in one FC game period and the number of FC games that can be added (continued) can be different from each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the number of ART initial games set in the current set may differ depending on the result of the FC mode lottery of the first game.

In addition, in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the ART continuous lottery is performed. Then, when the ART continuation lottery of the next set is decided by winning this ART continuation lottery, a loop mode promotion lottery for determining the ART continuation rate (loop rate) of the next set is performed in the first game. Will be played. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of loop (continuation) modes (loop modes 1 to 6) in which the ART continuation rates that can be set are different from each other are provided. In the loop mode promotion lottery, the loop mode is determined so that the ART continuation rate of the next set is higher than that of the current set.

Further, in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, after the above-mentioned FC mode type and the winning / non-winning of the ART continuation are determined, the ART game number addition lottery and the FC game number addition lottery are performed. ..

In the ART game number addition lottery, the ART game of the current set is based on the internal winning combination with reference to the FC middle addition lottery table (see FIGS. 73 to 75 described later) corresponding to the determined FC mode type. The number of additional games (hereinafter referred to as "the number of additional ART games") is determined. If the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won, the number of games added to the winning ART is added to the number of ART games remaining at that time (hereinafter referred to as "the number of remaining ART games").

Further, in the FC game number addition lottery, the current FC is based on the internal winning combination with reference to the FC game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 71 and 72 described later) corresponding to the determined FC mode type. The number of games to be added for the number of FC games during the game period (hereinafter referred to as "the number of FC games to be added") is determined. When the lottery for adding the number of FC games is won, the number of FC games remaining at that time (hereinafter referred to as "the number of remaining FC games") is added to the number of winning FC games. In this case, after the fifth game of the FC game, the FC game is continuously performed for the number of FC addition games.

In the present embodiment, a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained in the ART game number addition lottery for each type of FC mode, and the FC game number is always added (additional) in the FC game number addition lottery. Is associated with a predetermined internal winning combination for which is determined. Therefore, in the FC game, when a predetermined internal winning combination corresponding to the set FC mode is internally won, in the ART game number addition lottery, as compared with the case where another internal winning combination is internally won, as compared with the case where another internal winning combination is internally won. There is a possibility that a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained, and the additional number of FC games is always determined in the FC game number addition lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ART continuation lottery performed in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set is won, the ART latent lottery is performed in the first game. Then, when the ART latent lottery is won, the number of games during the game period in the ART latent state (the number of latent precursor games = 16 games or 32 games) is determined.

In the present embodiment, the ART has reached 15 consecutive villas (hereinafter referred to as "the number of consecutive villas"), and the number of consecutive villas has reached the 15th (hereinafter referred to as "15th consecutive villa"). If the ART continuation is won in the first game of the FC game at the start of the set (when the 16th consecutive ART is confirmed), the latent lottery is not performed. In this case, at the end of the 15th ART set, the sub-game state does not shift, and the ART state game called "ending ART" (specific notification game) described later is performed for a specific period, and then the 16th station. The game (ART set) in the ART state of is started.

Next, the playability of the second game to the final game (5 games + the number of FC addition games) of the FC game at the start of the ART set will be described. In the second game to the final game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the above-mentioned ART game number addition lottery and FC game number addition lottery are performed for each game.

Then, the ART addition games determined for each game are cumulatively added over the FC game period, and the total number of ART addition games finally obtained is the ART executed in the game period in the ART state of the current set. It is determined as the number of ART initial games of the game. If the total number of ART additional games finally acquired in the FC game at the start of the ART set is less than the predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games), the predetermined number of games is taken as the initial number of ART games. To do. That is, in the present embodiment, a function of guaranteeing the number of ART initial games to be given during the game period of one set of ART states is provided.

As described above, in the mode of determining the number of ART initial games of the present embodiment, the number of ART additional games determined for each unit game is cumulatively added over the FC game period of at least 5 games to obtain the number of ART initial games. It is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of games is given as the number of ART initial games even if the number of ART additional games is not won over the FC game period. Therefore, when the FC game at the start of the ART set is used as the mode for determining the number of ART initial games, for example, the number of ART initial games is determined by one lottery at the start of the ART set. Compared with the aspect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the aspect of determining the number of ART initial games.

(2) ART game and FC game during the ART set period When the FC game at the start of the ART set described above is completed, the ART game is started.

In the ART game, an ART game number addition lottery and an FC lottery are performed for each game. Then, when the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won, the number of games added to the winning ART is added to the number of remaining ART games at that time. Further, when the FC lottery is won, the FC game is executed as an interrupt process for a period of at least 5 games from the next game.

In the FC game during the set period of the ART, the ART game number addition lottery and the FC game number addition lottery are performed for each game in the same manner as the FC game at the start of the ART set. Therefore, in the FC game during the set period of ART, when the winning ART game number addition lottery is won, the number of ART addition games won is added to the remaining ART game number at that time, and the FC game number addition lottery is won. If so, the number of winning FC addition games is added to the number of remaining FC games at that time. If an FC game occurs during the ART set period, the number of games consumed during the FC game period is not subtracted from the number of remaining ART games in the current set.

Then, when the ART games of a predetermined number of ART games (the number of ART initial games + the total number of ART additional games) are consumed, the games in the ART state of the current set are completed. At this time, if it is decided to continue the ART, the ART of the next set is started, and the FC game and the ART game described above are executed again. However, at this time, if the ART latent lottery at the time of confirming (deciding) the continuation of ART is won, the game in the ART latent state for a specific period (16 games or 32 games) is digested after the ART game of the current set is completed. After that, the ART of the next set is started. On the other hand, if the ART continuation is not determined when the ART of the current set ends, the sub-game state transitions from the ART state to the normal state.

Further, in the unit game of the ART game, if the BB combination (internal winning combination related to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") is won and the BB combination wins, the sub-game state is the ART state. To the BB state.

At this time, the main gaming state shifts to the BB gaming state via the RT3 or RT4 gaming state (BB carry-over state) as described above. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 48, the transition path from the ART state to the BB state also has a BB flag inter-flag state corresponding to the RT3 or RT4 gaming state as a sub-game state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the FC mode lottery, the ART continuous lottery, the loop mode promotion lottery, the ART game number addition lottery, and the FC game number addition lottery However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the ART game number addition lottery and the FC game number addition lottery are not performed, only the FC mode lottery, the ART continuation lottery, and the loop mode promotion lottery are performed, and the second game. In the subsequent FC games, the ART game number addition lottery and the FC game number addition lottery may be performed.

In this case, in order to match the additional period of the number of ART games and the number of FC games in the FC game at the start of the ART set with that of the FC game during the ART set period, the FC game at the start of the ART set has two games. During the period from the first to at least the sixth game (the period of at least five games), the ART game number addition lottery and the FC game number addition lottery are performed. That is, in this case, only the FC game period at the start of the ART set is at least 6 games.

(3) Ending ART
In the present embodiment, when the number of consecutive villas of ART reaches 15 times and the ART continuation is won in the first game of the FC game at the start of the 15th consecutive ART set (the 16th consecutive ART is confirmed). In the case), at the end of the 15th consecutive ART set, the sub-game state does not shift, the game in the ART state called "ending ART" is performed for a specific period, and then the game (set) in the 16th consecutive ART state is performed. It will be started. In the ending ART, a predetermined predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined story is completed in a specific period) is executed over a specific period (a period of 50 games in the present embodiment).

49A and 49B show the game flow (time flow) when the ending ART is not performed and when the ending ART is performed, respectively.

If the ART continuation is not won in the first game of the FC game at the start of the 15th consecutive ART set, the sub-game state is usually after the end of the 15th consecutive ART set, as shown in FIG. 49A. It shifts to the state and the game in the normal state is started.

On the other hand, when the ART continuation is won in the first game of the FC game at the start of the 15th ART set (when the 16th ART is confirmed), the 15th ART is as shown in FIG. 49B. In the first game of the FC game at the start of the set, the ART latent lottery is not performed. Therefore, in this case, the sub-game state does not shift to the ART latent state after the end of the 15th consecutive ART set, and the ending ART game is started. Next, when the ending ART game is consumed by a specific number of games (50 games in this embodiment), the 16th consecutive ART state game (set) is started. The game period of the ending ART is not limited to 50 games, and can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the content of the effect performed during the game period of the ending ART.

In the ending ART, the above-mentioned ART game is performed for a specific period (a period of 50 games in this embodiment). Therefore, in the ending ART, each game, ART game number addition lottery and FC lottery are performed. However, in the ending ART, for example, since the production is performed so that a predetermined story is completed in a specific period, the game period of the ending ART is not extended. Therefore, the benefits won in the ART game number addition lottery and the FC lottery during the ending ART are stocked without being released during the ending ART. Then, as shown in FIG. 49B, the process of granting (releasing) the stocked benefits is collectively executed at the end of the ART game period of the next set (16th station).

For example, if the number of ART additional games is won by the ART game number addition lottery during the ending ART and the ART additional games are stocked, the total number of ART additional games stocked over the ending ART game period is the total number of games. At the end of the ART game period of the next set (16th station), it will be given as a bonus. Therefore, in this case, the 16th consecutive ART game period is extended by the total number of games added to the ART stocked over the game period of the ending ART.

Further, for example, when FC is won by FC lottery during the ending ART and FC games are stocked, the number of FC games stocked over the game period of the ending ART (number of sets) is the next set (16 consecutive sets). Eyes) will be given as a bonus at the end of the ART game period. Therefore, in this case, the 16th consecutive ART game period is extended by at least the number of stocks of FC games × the game period of 5 games. Further, in this case, if the number of games added to ART or the number of additional games of FC is obtained as a privilege during the digestion of the stocked FC games, the 16th consecutive ART game is further provided for the release period of the privilege. The period will be extended.

In the present embodiment, when both the number of ART additional games and the FC games are stocked during the ending ART, first, at the end of the ART game period of the next set (16th station), the stocked FC games are stocked. Is executed (released), and then ART games for the number of stocked ART additional games are executed (released). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stocked FC game may be executed (released) after the ART games for the number of stocked ART additional games are executed (released). In addition, when the privilege grant is decided in the ending ART, the final game of the ART game period of the next set (16th station) or at a specific timing after the end of the final game (for example, the final game of the 16th ART). At any time within the above, when betting the next game of the final game of the 16th ART, when the lever is turned on of the next game of the final game of the 16th ART, etc.), the privilege grant may be notified. In this case, for example, it is difficult to understand whether the granted privilege is the number of ART additional games acquired during the FC game of the 16th consecutive ART set or the number of ART additional games granted in the ending ART. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the series of game flows of the 15th ART, the ending ART, and the 16th ART described above, the game in the ART latent state (the game in the incubation period) is not performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress an increase in the opportunity for the player to wastefully consume the medal, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the release (execution) process of the privilege acquired during the ending ART is performed at the end of the 16th consecutive ART game period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the release timing of the privilege can be appropriately changed according to the content of the effect.

[BB state]
(1) Type of BB state The BB state corresponds to the BB game state of the main game state. As the BB state, as shown in FIG. 48, a BB state in which a BB game called "red 7BB" is performed (hereinafter referred to as "red 7BB state") and a BB state in which a BB game called "blue 7BB" is performed. Three types of states are provided: a state (hereinafter referred to as "blue 7BB state") and a BB state (hereinafter referred to as "premium BB state") in which a BB game called "premium BB" is performed.

The red 7BB state is a BB state that occurs when a BB combination (red 7BB) pertaining to any of the combination names "C_BB_02" to "C_BB_04" is won in a unit game in the normal state or the ART state. The blue 7BB state is a BB state that occurs when a BB combination (blue 7BB) pertaining to any of the combination names "C_BB_05" to "C_BB_09" is won in a unit game in the normal state or the ART state.

The premium BB state is a BB state that occurs when a BB combination (premium BB) related to the combination name "C_BB_01" is won in a unit game in the normal state or the ART state. In the normal state, when the BB combination related to the combination name "C_BB_01" wins a prize (when the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the premium BB state), the transition to the ART state is confirmed.

Hereinafter, the case where the BB state is a BB state shifted from the normal state is referred to as a “normal medium BB state”. Further, the case where the BB state is the red 7BB state shifted from the normal state is referred to as "normal medium red 7BB state", and the case where the BB state is the blue 7BB state shifted from the normal state is referred to as "normal medium blue 7BB state". Refer to. In the following, the red 7BB state and the blue 7BB state are collectively referred to as "7-matched BB state", and the normal medium red 7BB state and the normal medium-blue 7BB state are collectively referred to as "normal medium 7-matched BB state". ..

Further, in the following, the case where the BB state is the BB state shifted from the ART state is referred to as "the BB state during ART". Further, the case where the BB state is the red 7BB state shifted from the ART state is referred to as "ART medium red 7BB state", and the case where the BB state is the blue 7BB state shifted from the ART state is referred to as "ART medium blue 7BB state". Refer to. Further, in the following, the red 7BB state in ART and the blue 7BB state in ART are collectively referred to as "7-matched BB state in ART".

In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the premium BB state, the transition to the ART state is confirmed. Therefore, the game in the premium BB state when the normal state shifts to the premium BB state. The content is the same as the game content in the premium BB state when shifting from the ART state to the premium BB state. Therefore, in the following, the normal medium premium BB state and the ART medium premium BB state are not distinguished and are simply referred to as the premium BB state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game content in the former premium BB state may be configured to be different from the game content in the latter premium BB state. Further, in the present embodiment, the game content in the premium BB state is the same as the game content in the 7-match BB state during ART, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game content performed by both is different from each other. May be good.

(2) Game content in the BB state In each BB state, a special effect (hereinafter referred to as "judgment ring"), which is called "judgment ring", can be given (additional number of ART games or ART lottery). A lottery (hereinafter referred to as "JR lottery") is performed to determine whether or not to generate "JR production"). In the present embodiment, an example in which the JR lottery is performed regardless of the type of the internal winning combination in each game during the BB game will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, The JR lottery may be performed only when the Plum Lip or Bell Lip) wins.

In this JR effect (privilege grant effect), it is determined whether or not each timing of the first stop operation to the third stop operation of the main reel by the player is performed within the corresponding predetermined time range. Do. Then, when each stop operation by the player is performed at a timing within the corresponding predetermined time range (hereinafter referred to as "when JR is successful"), a privilege (addition of the number of ART games or ART lottery) is given to the player. Given.

In addition, in the normal BB state of 7 sets, when the JR effect occurs and the JR is successful, an ART lottery is given as a privilege. In addition, when the ART lottery is won by the JR effect of the 7-matched BB state, the process of determining the loop mode (continuation mode) of the winning ART is also performed by the lottery.

In the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART, when the JR effect occurs and the JR is successful, a predetermined number of additional ART games is given as a privilege. Then, the number of the added ART games given is added to the number of remaining ART games in the current set or the number of ART initial games of ART started after the end of the premium BB. At this time, the number of ART additional games to be given is determined in advance in the JR lottery from a plurality of types of ART additional games (5, 10 or 30 games). That is, in the present embodiment, at the same time as winning the JR effect, the number of ART additional games to be given when the JR is successful is also determined (see FIGS. 77 and 78 described later). The contents of the JR production will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

Further, in the 7-matched BB state and the premium BB state during ART, an additional lottery of the number of ART games is performed for each game, and when the lottery is won, the number of the winning ART additional games is the remaining ART games of the current set. It is added to the number or the number of ART initial games of ART started after the end of premium BB. That is, in the 7-match BB state and the premium BB state during ART, there is a possibility that not only the number of ART games added by the JR effect but also the number of ART games added by the ART addition lottery performed for each game can be obtained.

(3) Type of ART rush mode in the normal 7-match BB state In the BB game in the normal 7-match BB state, the ART winning probability (rush rate to the ART) in the ART lottery executed by the JR production and the winning ART There are a plurality of modes (hereinafter, referred to as "rush mode") in which the combination with the set continuation rate (ART continuation rate) is different from each other. In the present embodiment, four types of rush modes are provided: rush mode A, rush mode B, rush mode C, and rush mode D.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning ART in each rush mode is higher in the normal middle blue 7BB state than in the normal middle red 7BB state, so that the expectation of ART winning in the normal middle 7 uniform BB state is higher. It is set. Specifically, the ART winning probability and the ART continuation rate of each rush mode are set as follows (see FIGS. 79 and 80 described later).

In the rush mode A, the probability of winning ART in the normal middle red 7BB state is about 60%, and that in the normal middle blue 7BB state is about 80%. Further, in the rush mode A, one of the loop modes 1 to 6 is determined as the loop mode of the ART in both the normal middle red 7BB state and the normal middle blue 7BB state, and the ART continuation rate in the rush mode A is determined. , About 33% to 90%.

In the rush mode B, the probability of winning ART in the normal middle red 7BB state is about 45%, and that in the normal middle blue 7BB state is about 55%. Further, in the rush mode B, one of the loop modes 2 to 6 is determined as the loop mode of the ART in both the normal middle red 7BB state and the normal middle blue 7BB state, and the ART continuation rate in the rush mode B is determined. Is about 50% to 90%.

In the rush mode C, the probability of winning the ART in the normal middle red 7BB state is about 24%, and that in the normal middle blue 7BB state is about 36%. Further, in the rush mode C, one of the loop modes 4 to 6 is determined as the loop mode of the ART in both the normal middle red 7BB state and the normal middle blue 7BB state, and the ART continuation rate in the rush mode C is determined. Is about 75% to 90%.

Further, in the rush mode D, the ART winning probability in the normal middle red 7BB state is about 10%, and that in the normal middle blue 7BB state is about 18%. Further, in the rush mode D, the loop mode 6 is determined as the loop mode of the ART in both the normal middle red 7BB state and the normal middle blue 7BB state, and the ART continuation rate in the rush mode D is about 90%. It becomes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning probability (rush rate) of ART is in the order of rush modes A, B, C and D from the highest, and the ART continuation rate is rush mode D, from the highest. The order is C, B and A.

The above-mentioned rush mode is selected by the player in the ART rush mode selection effect performed at the start of the game in the normal middle 7 BB state (normal middle red 7BB state or normal middle blue 7BB state). The content of the ART rush mode selection effect will be described in detail in the flowchart of the ART rush mode selection process shown in FIG. 113, which will be described later.

(4) Transition mode of sub-game state at the end of BB The BB game in the various BB states described above ends when the number of medals exceeding a predetermined number is paid out (see FIG. 12). For example, the BB game in the premium BB state (BB game at the time of winning the BB role related to the combination name "C_BB_01") ends when more than 297 medals are paid out. In addition, in the BB game in the BB state (the BB game at the time of winning the BB role related to any of the combination names "C_BB_02" to "C_BB_09") during normal and ART, when more than 144 medals are paid out. finish.

When the BB game is completed in the normal BB state and the ART is won by the JR effect, the sub-game state shifts from the BB state to the ART state as shown in FIG. 48. As described in the transition flow of the main game state shown in FIG. 13, when the BB game in the normal BB state ends, the main game state shifts from the BB game state to the RT0 game state. That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the normal BB state to the ART state, the main game state shifts from the BB game state to the RT2 game state via the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. At this time, a navigation system for transitioning the RT game state in this way is generated.

Further, when the BB game is completed in the normal middle BB state and the ART is not won in the JR effect, the sub-game state shifts from the BB state to the normal state as shown in FIG. 48. At this time, when the normal state of the transition destination corresponds to the RT1 gaming state, the main gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT1 gaming state via the RT0 gaming state.

When the BB game is completed in the BB state during ART, the sub-game state shifts from the BB state to the ART state as shown in FIG. 48. As described in the transition flow of the main game state shown in FIG. 13, when the BB game in the BB state during ART ends, the main game state shifts from the BB game state to the RT0 game state. That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state during ART to the ART state, the main game state shifts from the BB game state to the RT2 game state via the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. At this time, a navigation system for transitioning the RT game state in this way is generated.

[ART preparation status]
In the present embodiment, when shifting from the normal state (including the ART latent state) or the BB state to the ART state, the sub-game state shifts to the ART via the ART preparation state.

(1) ART operation preparation period When the sub-game state shifts from the normal state (including the ART latent state) to the ART state, even if the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state in the main game state as described above. The ART game is not executed immediately after the transition. In this case, in the present embodiment, the preparation period for the ART game (hereinafter, "ART operation preparation period") from the transition of the RT game state to the RT2 game state until the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47. ) Exists. Then, when the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47, the sub-game state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state, and the ART game is started. That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the ART state, the sub-game state shifts to the ART state through the state of the ART operation preparation period as the ART preparation state.

Then, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect function is provided even in the state of the ART operation preparation period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state of the ART operation preparation period is managed as the ART preparation state.

In the state of the ART operation preparation period, for example, when the push order navigation of the normal replay role occurs twice, the correct answer is given to the push order navigation, and the next (third) normal replay role wins internally, ART The game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47. However, when the third normal replay combination is internally won, the push order navigation does not occur, and the push order of the stop buttons (reel stop order) does not matter.

Here, FIG. 50 shows the correspondence between the type of push order navigation that occurs in the game during the ART operation preparation period and the type of the normal replay combination. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination of the abbreviation "F_normal lip 1" is won during the ART operation preparation period, the order of pressing the stop button (reel stop order) is "right-left-middle". Is notified (navigation), and when the internal winning combination of the abbreviation "F_normal lip 2" is won, the order of "right-middle-left" is notified (navigation) as the pressing order of the stop button. In addition, when the internal winning combination of the abbreviation "F_normal lip 3" is won, the order of "middle-left-right" is notified (navigation) as the pressing order of the stop button, and the abbreviation "F_normal lip 4" is used. When the internal winning combination is won, the order of "middle-right-left" is notified (navigation) as the pressing order of the stop button.

Then, in the game during the ART operation preparation period, the unit game (ART game start signal is concentrated externally) that follows the push order navigation of the normal replay role twice and wins the next normal replay role after answering the push order navigation twice correctly. In the unit game output to the terminal plate 47, first, in conjunction with the stop operation of the main reel (triggered by the reception of the reel stop command), a specific liquid crystal symbol (for example, liquid crystal) related to the ART winning is performed by the liquid crystal sub reel described later. The effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the symbols "white 7" and the like) on the liquid crystal screen 11a becomes feasible. At this time, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) may display an instruction on the liquid crystal screen 11a to align the combination of specific liquid crystal symbols with the player on the liquid crystal reel. Next, in the unit game, after the third stop of the main reel, that is, after the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the specific liquid crystal symbols related to the ART winning by the liquid crystal sub reel described later is completed, the above-mentioned fourth game lock ( Weight) occurs. In addition, during the generation period of the fourth game lock, the effect device (liquid crystal display device 11, LED group 85, speaker group, etc.) is used to notify the start of ART under the control of the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102). Is done.

(2) RT transition preparation period When the sub-game state shifts from the BB state to the ART state, as described above, the main game state changes from the BB game state to the RT2 game state via the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. Move to the state. At this time, a navigation system for transitioning the RT game state in this way is generated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state of the process in which the main gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT2 gaming state via the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “RT transition preparation period state”) is also present. Manage as ART ready state.

When the sub-game state shifts from the normal BB state to the ART state, even if the main game state shifts to the RT2 game state, the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 immediately after the transition. There is an ART operation preparation period. That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state to the ART state during normal operation, the sub-game state shifts to the ART state via the RT transition preparation period state and the ART operation preparation period state as the ART preparation state. .. On the other hand, when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state during ART to the ART state, the ART game is restarted immediately after the main game state shifts to the RT2 game state. That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state during ART to the ART state, the sub-game state shifts to the ART state through the state of the RT transition preparation period as the ART preparation state.

In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the target combination (predetermined combination) in which navigation occurs during the ART operation preparation period is a combination related to replay (replay), but the present invention is not limited to this. The target combination (predetermined combination) in which navigation is generated during the ART operation preparation period may be, for example, a predetermined small combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the ART operation preparation period, the push order navigation of the predetermined combination (normal replay) occurs twice, the correct answer is given to the push order navigation, and the next (third) predetermined combination is Although an example in which the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 at the time of winning has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the ART operation preparation period, when the push order navigation of the predetermined combination occurs twice, the correct answer is given to the push order navigation, and the next (third) predetermined combination wins, the ART game start signal is output. It may be configured to be output to the external centralized terminal plate 47.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example in which the ART operation preparation period does not occur when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state during ART to the ART state has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Even when the sub-game state shifts from the BB state during ART to the ART state, the sub-game state shifts to the ART state via the RT transition preparation period state and the ART operation preparation period state as the ART preparation state. You may.

[Various control flags for sub-game status]
In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) manages and controls the occurrence status and transition mode of the various sub game states described above based on the on / off states of the various control flags (sub control flags). (See the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 108 to 128 described later).

FIG. 51 shows a correspondence table between each of the above-mentioned sub-game states and the sub-control flags provided for each sub-game state.

The "normal flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the normal state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the normal state.

The "ART start flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is an ART set start game (ART operation period start game), and is turned on when the current game is an ART set start game. Become. The "ART flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the ART state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the ART state.

Further, the "ending ART flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is a game during the ending ART described above, and is turned on when the current game is a game during the ending ART. Further, the "16th ART flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is a game during the 16th ART performed after the ending ART ends, and the current game is a game during the 16th ART. If, it is turned on.

The "ART latent flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the ART latent state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the ART latent state.

The "first ART preparation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the state of the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state), and is turned on when the sub-game state is the state of the RT transition preparation period. It becomes a state. Further, the "second ART preparation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the state of the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state), and when the sub-game state is the state of the ART operation preparation period. Is turned on.

The "FC start flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is the start game of the FC game period, and is turned on when the current game is the start game of the FC game period. The "FC generation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is a game during the FC game period, and is turned on when the current game is a game during the FC game period.

The "red 7BB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the red 7BB state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the red 7BB state. The "blue 7BB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the blue 7BB state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the blue 7BB state. Further, the "BB start flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the current game is the start game of the game period of red 7BB or blue 7BB. The "premium BB flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state is the premium BB state, and is turned on when the sub-game state is the premium BB state.

For example, when the sub-game state is the normal middle red 7BB state, both the normal flag and the red 7BB flag are turned on. When the sub-game state shifts from the normal middle red 7BB state to the normal state, only the red 7BB flag is turned off among the normal flag and the red 7BB flag. Further, for example, when the sub-game state is the red 7BB state during ART, both the ART flag and the red 7BB flag are turned on. When the sub-game state shifts from the red 7BB state during ART to the ART state, only the red 7BB flag is turned off among the ART flag and the red 7BB flag. Further, in the initial state, among the various control flags described above, only the normal flag is turned on.

In the present embodiment, a method of controlling the management and transition of various sub-game states in the sub-control circuit 101 by using the various sub-control flags described above will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various subs. Any method can be used as long as it can control the management and transition of the gaming state.

<Various abbreviations for internal winning combinations used to control the sub CPU>
FIG. 52 shows a correspondence table between the abbreviations of the internal winning combination used in the various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables managed by the sub CPU 102 and the abbreviations of the above-mentioned internal winning combination managed by the main CPU 93. Here, among the abbreviations of the internal winning combination used on the sub control circuit 101 side (hereinafter, referred to as “sub side”), an abbreviation different from the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used on the main control circuit 91 side will be briefly described.

In the present embodiment, any of "1" to "4" can be obtained as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" can be obtained as a bonus data pointer (abbreviated as "F_normal lip 1" to ". The replay role of "F_normal lip 4") is referred to as "plum lip" on the sub side. In addition, an internal winning combination (abbreviated as "F_RT2 transition lip_213" to "F_RT2 transition") in which any of "5" to "9" is obtained as a small role / replay data pointer and "0" is obtained as a bonus data pointer. The replay role of "Rip_321") is referred to as "Bell Lip" on the sub side. Also on the sub side, the replay roles of "Plum Lip" and "Bell Lip" are collectively referred to as normal replay roles.

In addition, when the number of winnings of a normal replay combination reaches the above-mentioned specified number of replays and the cycle chance is won, this winning combination is referred to as "chance lip B" on the sub side. In addition, on the sub side, "Chance Lip" is used as an internal winning combination (abbreviated as "F_Chance Lip" replay role) that obtains "9" as a small role / replay data pointer and "0" as a bonus data pointer. It is called "A".

In addition, the internal winning combination (abbreviated as "F_left bell 1" to "F_right bell 8" related to the bell) in which any of "11" to "34" can be obtained as the data pointer for the small combination / replay is used. On the sub side, it is called "push order bell". The internal winning combination (small combination of the abbreviation "F_RB combination") in which "40" is obtained as the data pointer for the small combination / replay is referred to as "all small combination" on the sub side.

Further, the internal winning combination (BB combination such as abbreviation "F_BB_01") in which "1" is obtained as the bonus data pointer is referred to as "premium BB" on the sub side. Furthermore, the internal winning combination (abbreviated as "FB_02" to "F_BB_05" or other BB role) from which any of "2" to "5" can be obtained as a bonus data pointer is referred to as "red 7BB" on the sub side, and a bonus is provided. The internal winning combination (abbreviated as BB combination such as "F_BB_06" to "F_BB_09") from which any one of "6" to "9" can be obtained as a data pointer is referred to as "blue 7BB" on the sub side.

<Various effects performed by the sub-control circuit>
Next, various characteristic effects executed in the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) will be described.

[Production using LCD sub reel]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, three reel images (hereinafter referred to as "liquid crystal sub reel") are displayed on the display screen (hereinafter referred to as "liquid crystal screen") of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the liquid crystal sub reel is rotated by the main reel. It is equipped with an effect function that displays fluctuations according to the operation.

(1) Configuration of Liquid Crystal Sub-Reel FIG. 53 shows an example of the display mode of the liquid crystal sub-reel on the liquid crystal screen 11a. In the present embodiment, three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R (left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, middle liquid crystal sub reel 110C, right liquid crystal sub reel 110R) are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a as in the case of the three main reels. Further, in each liquid crystal sub reel, various liquid crystal symbols (decorative symbols) are variably displayed in a predetermined order as in the main reel.

FIG. 54 shows an array of various liquid crystal symbols displayed on each liquid crystal sub reel. In the present embodiment, the number of liquid crystal symbols arranged on each liquid crystal sub reel is 21, unlike that of the main reel (20). Further, the basic variable display direction (rotational direction) of the liquid crystal symbol in the variable display effect of each liquid crystal sub-reel is a direction from the position "20" of the liquid crystal symbol to the position "0" of the liquid crystal symbol.

The liquid crystal symbols arranged on each liquid crystal sub reel shall be different from the symbols drawn on the main reel. In the example shown in FIG. 54, there is a liquid crystal symbol having the same name as the symbol of the main reel (see FIG. 8), but the mode of the liquid crystal symbol is different from that of the symbol of the main reel. Further, the liquid crystal symbol "door" in each liquid crystal sub-reel is a liquid crystal symbol that can be appropriately changed to a predetermined liquid crystal symbol according to the type of the internal winning combination and the content of the effect. The configuration of each liquid crystal sub-reel (number, type, arrangement order, etc. of liquid crystal symbols) is not limited to this example, and can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the pattern of the present embodiment, three liquid crystal symbols arranged continuously are displayed in the display area of each liquid crystal sub reel, similarly to the main reel. Therefore, the display area of each liquid crystal sub-reel is formed with the display areas of the upper, middle, and lower liquid crystal symbols, and the display areas of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, and 110R are in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns. The liquid crystal pattern is displayed.

Further, in the display area of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R, an effective line (hereinafter, referred to as "effective line for directing") is provided in which the combination of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. FIG. 55 shows effective production lines provided in the display areas of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, and 110R.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, five effective lines for effect are provided in the display areas of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110. Specifically, as an effective production line, a virtual line connecting the middle region of the left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, the middle region of the middle liquid crystal sub reel 110C, and the middle region of the right liquid crystal sub reel 110R (center line: line CL in FIG. 55). Virtual line connecting the upper area of the left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, the upper area of the middle liquid crystal sub reel 110C and the upper area of the right liquid crystal sub reel 110R (top line: line TL in FIG. 55), the lower area of the left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, the middle liquid crystal sub reel Virtual line connecting the lower region of 110C and the lower region of the right liquid crystal sub reel 110R (bottom line: line BL in FIG. 55), the lower region of the left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, the middle region of the middle liquid crystal sub reel 110C and the upper stage of the right liquid crystal sub reel 110R. A virtual line connecting the regions (cross-up line: line CUL in FIG. 55), and a virtual line connecting the upper region of the left liquid crystal sub reel 110L, the middle region of the middle liquid crystal sub reel 110C, and the lower region of the right liquid crystal sub reel 110R (cross down). Line: Five virtual lines (line CDL) in FIG. 55 are provided.

(2) Example of basic operation of production using liquid crystal sub-reel In the production using the liquid crystal sub-reel described above, for example, after the lever is turned on, the liquid crystal of each liquid crystal sub-reel is based on the production content determined according to the internal winning combination. The design is variablely displayed (rotated) in a predetermined mode on the liquid crystal screen 11a. Next, when the third stop operation is performed on the main reel and the winning combination is determined, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for effect.

FIG. 56 shows an example of correspondence between the winning combination name on the sub side and the combination of the liquid crystal symbols (combination of symbol images) that is stopped and displayed on the effective line for production. In addition, the winning combination names "Premium BB", "Red 7BB" and "Blue 7BB" on the sub side are the cases where the winning combination abbreviations "Premium BB", "Red 7BB" and "Blue 7BB" on the sub side win respectively. It is a name. In addition, the winning combination name "normal replay" on the sub side is the name when the winning role abbreviation "Plumlip" or "Belllip" on the sub side wins, and the winning combination name "chance eye" on the sub side is the sub side. This is the name when the winning role abbreviation "Chance Lip A" or "Chance Lip B" is won. In addition, the winning combination names "pushing order bell" and "common bell" on the sub side are the names when the winning combination abbreviations "pushing order bell" and "common bell" on the sub side win respectively. Furthermore, the winning combination name "watermelon" on the sub side is the name when the winning role abbreviation "strong watermelon" or "weak watermelon" on the sub side wins, and the winning combination name "cherry" on the sub side is the sub side. This is the name when the winning role abbreviation "strong che", "weak che" or "medium che" wins a prize.

When the winning combination is premium BB, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "BAR"-"BAR"-"BAR" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for production. When the winning combination is red 7BB, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for production, and the winning combination is blue 7BB. In the case of, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "blue 7"-"blue 7"-"blue 7" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for effect.

Further, when the winning combination is a normal replay, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols "Plum Lip"-"Plum Lip"-"Plum Lip" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for production. When the winning combination is the chance eye, a predetermined combination of liquid crystal symbols (combination of specific symbol images) related to the chance eye is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for effect. As the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance, a combination of a plurality of types of liquid crystal symbols is prepared. For example, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols "Plumlip"-"Plumlip"-"Bell", "Plumlip"-"Plumlip" "-" Watermelon "is a combination of liquid crystal symbols related to chances.

If the winning combination is a push order bell or a common bell, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "bell"-"bell"-"bell" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for production, and the winning combination is watermelon. In the case of, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for effect. Further, when the winning combination is cherry, the combination of liquid crystal symbols "cherry"-"ANY (arbitrary liquid crystal symbol)"-"ANY" is stopped and displayed on at least one effective line for production.

The type and number of effective lines for effect on which the combination of liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned winning combination is displayed are appropriately set according to, for example, the content of the internal winning combination and the content of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect operation using the liquid crystal sub reel described above is controlled by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (display effect executing means) for executing the effect using the liquid crystal sub-reel described above.

(3) Production Using Liquid Crystal Sub-Reel at Cycle Chance Winning Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production using the liquid crystal sub-reel, which is executed when the cycle chance hit is won, will be described.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the cycle chance is internally won, a game lock (second game lock) of the main reel is generated as described above. Therefore, in the sub-reel production at the time of the cycle chance, first, the three liquid crystal sub-reels 110L, 110C, 110R are variably displayed during the game lock generation period of the main reel, and the three liquid crystal sub-reels 110L, 110C, 110R. Performs a sub-reel effect that alternately repeats the effect of stopping and displaying.

In the sub-reel production performed during the game lock (second game lock) generation period, first, a combination of liquid crystal symbols related to a normal replay combination (predetermined internal winning combination) ("Plum Lip"-"Plum Lip"-" "Plum lip") is stopped and displayed (predetermined display) on the predetermined effective lines for production of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R. Next, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols (“Plumlip”-“Plumlip”-“Bell”, etc.) related to the chance eye (specific internal winning combination) is stopped and displayed (specific display) on the predetermined effective line for production.

After that, every time the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R stop and display, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance is displayed on the predetermined effective line for effect. Further, at this time, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to different types of chances is stopped and displayed every time the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R stop and display. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the sub-reel effect at the time of winning the cycle chance, the fluctuation display of the three liquid crystal sub-reels 110L, 110C, 110R is stopped and displayed only once during the game lock generation period of the main reel. It may be the composition of the production.

Next, when the game lock generation period of the main reel ends, the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, and 110R are displayed in a variable manner again. Then, when the cycle chance eye is won, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance eye is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line for the effect, instead of the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the normal replay combination. At this time, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance eyes that are stopped and displayed may be the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the chance eyes that are not stopped and displayed during the game lock, or during the game lock. It may be the same combination of liquid crystal symbols as one of the combinations of liquid crystal symbols related to the plurality of types of chances displayed as stopped.

If the effect using the liquid crystal sub-reel at the time of the cycle chance as described above is provided, various effects can be shown to the player during the lock period, so that the player's interest in the lock function can be further enhanced. Can be done.

(4) Notification effect of ART winning using the liquid crystal sub-reel in the ART preparation state In the present embodiment, as described above, in the ART operation preparation period, the push order navigation of the normal replay role is followed twice, and the push order navigation is performed. If the next normal replay combination is won after answering correctly twice, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) is the main in the unit game (unit game in which the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47). In conjunction with the reel stop operation (triggered by the reception of the reel stop command), an ART winning notification effect using the liquid crystal sub reel is performed.

Specifically, a specific liquid crystal symbol related to the ART prize (for example, the liquid crystal symbol "for example," is linked to the stop operation of the main reel on the predetermined effective lines for production set on the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R. The effect of stopping and displaying the combination of "white 7" etc.) is performed.

(5) Special production using the liquid crystal sub-reel during FC games (production called "Dome Fusion")
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the FC game, an ART game number addition lottery (an additional lottery for the number of ART games) is performed for each game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the FC game, when the winning combination of the ART game number addition lottery is won and the winning combination is determined, the sub-reel that stops and displays the combination of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the winning combination on the predetermined effective line for production. In addition to performing the effect (predetermined display), the effect of displaying the acquired number of ART additional games on the liquid crystal screen 11a (hereinafter referred to as "FC medium basic effect") is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a part of the rare role is won in the FC game in the FC mode other than the FC mode 5, 100 games (predetermined number) or more of ART are added by the ART game number addition lottery. You can get the number of games. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a small winning combination related to watermelon (weak watermelon or strong watermelon: the specified internal winning combination), any of 100, 200, and 300 games is determined as the number of games added to ART. There is a possibility (see FIGS. 73 and 74 below). Then, when such a large number of ART additional games are acquired, a special effect different from the above-mentioned basic effect during FC (hereinafter, referred to as "special effect during FC") is performed.

In the special production during FC, the value (2) obtained when the value (100, 200 or 300) of the number of acquired ART additional games is divided by a positive divisor of the acquired ART addition games in the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C and 110R. On the same number of effective lines for production as (any of 5), the combination of liquid crystal symbols ("watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon") related to the internal winning combination (a part of the rare role) is stopped and displayed. .. Furthermore, in the special production during FC, the number of acquired ART additional games is not displayed (notified) as it is on the liquid crystal screen 11a, along with the stop display of the combination of the liquid crystal symbols, but "the number of acquired ART additional games is positive. It is displayed (notified) in the manner of "the number of ART additional games having the same value as the divisor of" x the number of effective lines for production in which the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the internal winning combination (a part of the rare role) is stopped and displayed. The positive divisor is appropriately set according to, for example, the number of acquired ART games.

For example, in FC games in FC modes other than FC mode 5, when the internal winning combination (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) related to watermelon is won and the number of ART additional games of 100 games is obtained, the liquid crystal related to watermelon A combination of symbols ("watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon") is stopped and displayed on two effective lines for production, and as an acquired ART addition game, for example, the wording "+ 50G x 2 times" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Displayed on 11a. In addition, for example, in FC games, when the internal winning combination (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) related to watermelon is won and the number of ART additional games of 300 games is obtained, the combination of liquid crystal symbols related to watermelon (“watermelon””. -"Watermelon"-"Watermelon") is displayed as a stop display of 5 (all) effective lines for production, and as an acquired ART addition game, for example, the wording "+ 60G x 5 times" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a. ..

When such a special production during FC is performed, it is possible to give the player a feeling that the number of games added to ART has dramatically increased, and at the same time, a production with a premium feeling compared to the above-mentioned basic production during FC. Can be given to the player. Therefore, during the FC game period, by providing the above-mentioned function of the special effect during FC, the player's interest in the FC game can be further enhanced. The configuration of the special effect during FC is not limited to this example, and the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the internal winning combination (a part of the rare role) is not performed to display the number of acquired ART additional games in multiples. May be notified that the number of ART additional games of 100 or more games has been acquired only by stopping and displaying on a plurality of effective lines for production.

(6) Continuous striking effect during FC mode 5 (A) Outline of continuous striking effect In the present embodiment, FC mode 5 is set (selected) in the first game of the FC game, and ART is performed in the unit game during the FC game period. When the number of additional games is acquired, the player is made to continuously press the selection button 25 (chance button) during the unit game in which the number of additional ART games is acquired (hereinafter referred to as "continuous hitting operation"). An effect of notifying the number of acquired ART additional games (hereinafter referred to as "continuous hitting effect") is performed.

In this continuous hitting effect, the number of ART additional games determined by lottery is divided into a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as "subdivision games"), and the number is subdivided for each pressing operation on the liquid crystal screen 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. The number of games is added and displayed. Then, when the result of the cumulative addition of the number of subdivided games reaches the number of ART added games determined by lottery, the addition display effect of the number of subdivided games ends, and then the number of ART added games determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the screen 11a.

In addition, the type of the number of subdivision games to be additionally displayed may be one type or a plurality of types may be provided. In addition, when a plurality of types of subdivision games are provided, the number of discontinuous subdivision games such as +1, +3, +7, +10, +30 and +50 is used as the configuration of the plurality of subdivision games. It may be set, or the number of consecutive subdivision games may be set at +1 game intervals.

For example, if the type of the number of subdivided games is only +1 game and the number of ART addition games determined by lottery is 10 games, when the player starts the continuous hitting operation of the selection button 25 in the continuous hitting effect, the selection is made. Each time the button 25 is pressed, the liquid crystal screen 11a is displayed with an addition of "+1 game" (number of subdivided games). Then, when the player presses the selection button 25 10 times (continuous hitting operation), the addition display effect of the number of subdivided games on the liquid crystal screen 11a ends, and the liquid crystal screen 11a is determined by lottery. The number of games added to ART "+10 games" is notified (displayed).

By providing the above-described continuous hitting effect execution function, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the effect in the notification effect of the acquisition of the privilege accompanied by the player's predetermined operation.

(B) Specific Example of Continuous Strike Effect Next, a specific example of the continuous striking effect performed during FC mode 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. It should be noted that FIGS. 57 to 60 are diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a during the continuous hitting effect.

First, in the FC game, when the continuous hitting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 57A, an image 130 of a character suggesting that the FC mode is the FC mode 5 (hereinafter, “character image”) is in the center of the liquid crystal screen 11a. 130 ") is displayed. Next, a circular image 131 (hereinafter referred to as "absorption ball image 131") suggesting the cumulative addition number of the number of subdivision games is displayed above the character image 130, and one side of the character image 130 (hereinafter referred to as "absorption ball image 131"). In this example, on the right side), an image 132 (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous hitting instruction image 132”) indicating that the player is instructed to repeatedly hit the selection button 25 (chance button) is displayed. In the following, the effect screen on which the continuous hitting instruction image 132 is displayed is referred to as a “continuous hitting screen”.

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the selection button 25 according to the continuous hitting instruction of the selection button 25 displayed on the continuous hitting screen, the addition is added for each pressing operation of the selection button 25 as shown in FIGS. 58A, 58B and 59A. A circular image 133,134 (hereinafter referred to as “subdivision ball image 133, 134”) indicating the number of subdivision games (+1, +5 or +10 games) is generated at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal screen 11a, and then absorbed. An image display effect of flying toward the ball image 131 is performed. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of the generation positions of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 and the locus patterns of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 flying toward the absorbing ball image 131, that is, the effect display patterns of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134. It is provided, and is appropriately determined according to the content of the continuous striking effect (continuous striking effect pattern) determined based on the number of ART additional games.

Then, when the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 move into the display area of the absorption ball image 131, an image display effect is performed so that the subdivision ball images 133 and 134 are absorbed by the absorption ball image 131, and the subdivision ball image 133 is performed. , 134 disappears. In this example, the size of the subdivided ball image 134 when the number of subdivided games is +10 games or more is made larger than the subdivided ball image 133 when the number of subdivided games is less than +10 games.

Further, in the process of displaying the subdivision ball images 133 and 134 flying to the absorption ball image 131 on the continuous striking screen shown in FIGS. 58A, 58B and 59A, the subdivision ball images 133 and 134 absorbed by the absorption ball image 131. When the total number of subdivided games corresponding to (the cumulative number of subdivided games added) exceeds a predetermined value, a display effect is performed so that the size of the absorption ball image 131 is gradually increased.

In this example, when the total number of subdivision games (cumulative addition number of subdivision games) corresponding to the subdivision ball images 133 and 134 absorbed by the absorption ball image 131 is +11 games or more, the size of the absorption ball image 131 is one. Gradual increase (changes from small size to medium size). Further, when the total number of subdivided games (cumulative addition number of subdivided games) corresponding to the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 absorbed by the absorbed ball image 131 becomes +30 games or more, the size of the absorbed ball image 131 is further increased by one step. Larger (changes from medium size to large size). For example, the size of the absorption ball image 131 shown in FIG. 58A is a small size, the size of the absorption ball image 131 shown in FIG. 58B is a medium size, and the size of the absorption ball image 131 shown in FIG. 59A is a large size.

Then, when the total number of subdivision games (cumulative addition number of subdivision games) corresponding to the subdivision ball images 133 and 134 absorbed by the absorption ball image 131 reaches the number of ART addition games determined by lottery, the continuous hit screen is displayed. The flying display effect of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 in the above is completed. Next, as shown in FIG. 59B, an image 135 (hereinafter, referred to as “MAX pressing instruction image 135”) indicating that the player is instructed to press the MAX bet button 21 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a. At the same time, the character image 130 grabs the absorption ball image 131, and an image of the preparatory operation before the absorption ball image 131 is thrown down is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the MAX bet button 21 according to the MAX pressing instruction image 135 shown in FIG. 59B, an image display effect in which the character image 130 throws the absorbing ball image 131 down is performed on the liquid crystal screen 11a. Next, an image display effect is performed in which the thrown-down absorption ball image 131 bursts, and then, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of ART additional games (+300 games in this example) determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a. It is displayed (notified). The notification screen for the number of additional ART games is maintained until the lever is turned on in the next game. In the present embodiment, the continuous striking effect is performed in this way.

If the player does not perform the continuous striking operation for a predetermined period after the start of the continuous striking effect, the addition display effect of the number of subdivided games (the effect of FIGS. 58A, 58B and 59A) is not performed, and FIG. 59B The MAX bet button pressing instruction screen shown in FIG. 60 or the notification screen of the number of ART additional games determined by the lottery shown in FIG. 60 may be displayed. In addition, when the player performs an operation up to the third stop operation of the main reel during the period of the addition display effect of the number of subdivided games (the effect of FIGS. 58A, 58B and 59A) after the start of the continuous hitting effect. May display the MAX bet button pressing instruction screen shown in FIG. 59B during the addition display effect of the number of subdivided games.

(C) Data Structure of Continuous Strike Effect Pattern Next, with reference to FIGS. 61A and 61B, a data configuration of the continuous strike effect pattern referred to when executing the above-mentioned continuous stroke effect will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a data configuration example of a continuous hitting effect pattern when the number of ART additional games determined by lottery in the unit game of the FC game is 10 games, and FIG. 61B is a diagram showing the unit game of the FC game. It is a figure which shows the data composition example of the continuous hitting effect pattern when the number of ART addition games determined by lottery is 50 games.

As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the data of the continuous hitting effect pattern is the number of repeated hits (1st to 30th in this example) and the subdivided ball images 133, 134 (extension mode) associated with each number of repeated hits. Production pattern of the image) (hereinafter referred to as "subdivided ball pattern"), production pattern of the absorption ball image 131 (cumulative addition number image) (hereinafter referred to as "absorption ball pattern") and addition display number (extension period display number) It is defined by each data.

The data defined in the subdivided ball pattern is any of "1" to "20", and the size of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134, the position of occurrence of the subdivided ball images 133 and 134 on the liquid crystal screen 11a, and the flight trajectory. Specify the type. Specifically, the data "1" to "10" of the subdivided ball pattern are data that define the generation position and the type of the flying locus of the subdivided ball image 133 of a small size (the number of subdivided games is less than 10 games). On the other hand, the data "11" to "20" of the subdivided ball pattern are data that define the generation position and the type of the flying locus of the subdivided ball image 134 of a large size (the number of subdivided games is 10 games or more).

The data defined in the absorption ball pattern is any one of "0" to "2", and is data that defines the mode of increasing the size of the absorption ball image 131. The absorption ball pattern data "0" corresponds to the absorption ball image 131 without size increase, and the absorption ball pattern data "1" changes the size of the absorption ball image 131 from a small size to a medium size (size increase). The absorption ball pattern data "2" corresponds to a pattern in which the size of the absorption ball image 131 changes (sizes up) from a medium size to a large size.

The data specified in the number of addition displays is the value of the number of subdivision games (+1, +3, +5, +7, +10, +30 and +50) that is cumulatively added for each repeated hit operation (each operation of pressing the selection button 25). (Any value of) is specified. Further, as shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, "-1" is also specified in the data specified in the number of addition displays. This data "-1" is data (end determination data) indicating the end trigger of the repeated hit operation, and if "-1" is specified in the column of the number of additions corresponding to the next number of repeated hits, the current data "-1" It means that the repeated hitting operation is completed by the number of repeated hits.

The data configuration example of the continuous striking effect pattern shown in FIG. 61A (an example in which the number of games added to ART is 10 games) is a data configuration example of the continuous striking effect in which the number of times the pressing operation is executed is 10 times, and each continuous striking operation is performed. This is an example of data configuration when the number of subdivided games displayed in addition is +1 game. In this example, since the continuous hitting effect is completed by the continuous hitting operation 10 times, the addition display number "1" is defined for each of the repeated hitting times "1" to "10", and the continuous hitting number "11" or later is repeatedly hit. The addition display number "-1" is defined for the number of times.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61A, the size of the subdivided ball image 133 in each of the number of repeated hits "1" to "10" is small, so that the size of the subdivided ball image 133 is small for each of the number of repeated hits "1" to "10". Any one of "1" to "10" is defined in the data of the subdivided ball pattern. In this example, the data "1" to "10" of the subdivided ball pattern is defined for each of the number of repeated hits "1" to "10", and the subdivided ball pattern changes for each repeated hit operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61A, since the number of ART additional games finally notified by the continuous hitting effect is 10, the size of the absorption ball image 131 during the continuous hitting effect remains small. Therefore, "0" (without size increase) is defined in the data of the absorption ball pattern in each of the number of repeated hits "1" to "10".

Further, the data configuration example of the continuous striking effect pattern shown in FIG. 61B (an example in which the number of ART additional games is 50 games) is a data configuration example of the continuous striking effect in which the number of times the pressing operation is executed is 10. Further, in the data configuration example of the continuous hitting effect pattern shown in FIG. 61B, the number of subdivided games that are additionally displayed by the number of consecutive hits of the third time is +3 games, and the number of subdivided games that are additionally displayed by the number of repeated hits of the sixth time is +10 games. This is a data configuration example in which the number of subdivided games displayed in addition with the number of consecutive hits of the 10th time is +30 games, and the number of subdivided games displayed in addition with the number of other repeated hits is +1 game.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the addition display number "1" is defined for each of the number of repeated hits "1", "2", "4", "5" and "7" to "9". , The addition display number "3" is specified for the number of repeated hits "3", the addition display number "10" is specified for the number of repeated hits "6", and the addition display number "30" is specified for the number of repeated hits "10". Is stipulated. Then, in this example, since the continuous hitting effect is completed by the continuous hitting operation 10 times, the addition display number "-1" is defined for the number of repeated hits after the number of repeated hits "11".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the size of the subdivided ball image 133 in each of the number of repeated hits "1" to "5" and "7" to "9" is small, so that the number of repeated hits "1" to "9" For each of "5" and "7" to "9", any one of "1" to "10" is defined in the data of the subdivided ball pattern. In this example, the data "1" to "5" and "7" to "9" of the subdivided ball pattern are used for the number of repeated hits "1" to "5" and "7" to "9", respectively. It is stipulated, and the subdivision ball pattern changes with each repeated hit operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the size of the subdivided ball image 134 in each of the number of repeated hits "6" and "10" is large, so that the number of repeated hits "6" and "10" is increased. Any of "11" to "20" is defined in the data of the subdivided ball pattern. In this example, the data "16" and "20" of the subdivided ball pattern are defined for the number of repeated hits "6" and "10", respectively, and the number of repeated hits "6" and "10" is The production of subdivided ball patterns different from each other is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, since the number of ART additional games finally notified by the continuous hitting effect is 50 games, the size of the absorption ball image 131 is gradually changed (sized up) during the continuous hitting effect. .. Specifically, since the cumulative addition number (17 games) of the number of subdivided games is 11 games or more when the number of repeated hits is "6", "1" is defined as the data of the absorption ball pattern when the number of repeated hits is "6". .. That is, when the sixth continuous striking operation is performed, the size of the absorption ball image 131 changes from a small size to a medium size. Further, in this example, since the cumulative addition number (50 games) of the number of subdivided games is 30 games or more when the number of repeated hits is "10", "2" is defined as the data of the absorption ball pattern when the number of repeated hits is "10". To. That is, when the tenth (last) repeated hitting operation is performed, the size of the absorption ball image 131 changes from the medium size to the large size. Since the size of the absorption ball image 131 is not increased with the other number of repeated hits, the data "0" is defined in the effect pattern of the absorption ball.

As the continuous hitting effect pattern, a plurality of types of continuous hitting effect patterns may be provided for the number of one type of ART additional games. In that case, for example, a predetermined continuous striking effect pattern may be selected according to the type of the internal winning combination, or the continuous striking using the lottery value for selecting the continuous striking effect pattern regardless of the type of the internal winning combination. The production pattern may be selected.

(7) Production using the liquid crystal sub-reel at the time of winning the push order bell In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a small winning combination related to the pushing order bell is won, the number of medals to be paid out is one. , And the "three-card combination" in which the number of medals paid out is three and the "9-card combination" in which the number of medals paid out is nine are duplicated (acquisition of data pointers 19 to 34 for small role / replay). (Time), or "1 card combination" and "9 card combination" are duplicated (when acquiring small combination / replay data pointers 11-18).

In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointers 11 to 18 are internally won by the small winning combination related to the pushing order bell for the forward pressing correct answer (the small winning combination in which the 9-card combination wins when the left reel 3L is first stopped). (See FIGS. 9 to 11 and 25 to 27). In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointers 19 to 34 have a small winning combination related to the pressing order bell for the irregular pressing correct answer (a small winning combination in which 9 reels win when the reels other than the left reel 3L are first stopped). Obtained when winning internally. That is, in the present embodiment, when the push order bell for the forward push correct answer is internally won, the 1-card combination and the 9-card combination are duplicately won, and when the push order bell for the irregular push correct answer is internally won. The 1st, 3rd and 9th cards are duplicated.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the push order bell is won in the normal state and the push order bell wins, the medal is paid out, but on the effective lines for the production of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R. Does not stop and display the combination of liquid crystal symbols related to the push order bell ("bell"-"bell"-"bell": bell-aligned symbol).

However, when the push order bell wins and the push order bell wins in the ART state, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the push order bell (bell-aligned symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line for production. At this time, if the 9-card combination wins, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the push order bell (bell-aligned symbol) is stopped and displayed on the center line of the three liquid crystal sub reels 110L, 110C, 110R, and the three liquid crystal sub-reel 110L, 110C, 110R are displayed. When the winning combination is won, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the push order bell is stopped and displayed on the cross-down line. In addition, when a single winning combination is won, the combination of the liquid crystal symbols related to the push order bell is stopped and displayed on the effective production line other than the center line and the cross-down line.

[JR (Judgment Ring) production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the contents of the JR effect performed during the game period in the BB state will be described. Note that FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the JR effect, and is a schematic view of an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 when the JR effect is executed.

(1) Operation when a JR effect is generated The JR effect is a mini-game that requires a player's operation intervention. In the JR production, it is determined whether or not each timing of the first stop operation to the third stop operation on the main reel by the player, that is, the reception timing of each reel stop command in the sub CPU 102 is within the corresponding predetermined time range. Perform a judgment effect. Then, when each stop operation by the player is performed at a timing within the corresponding predetermined time range (when JR is successful), a predetermined privilege (ART lottery or addition of the number of ART games) is given to the player. ..

Specifically, when the JR effect is started, as shown in FIG. 62, the liquid crystal screen 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 has a substantially disk-shaped image 120 (hereinafter referred to as “JR image 120”” that imitates a clock. ) Is displayed. On the JR image 120, a hand image 121 that imitates the hands of a clock is superimposed and displayed. Further, in the JR image 120, three time ranges (hereinafter, referred to as "success range") of the timing of the stop operation in which the JR is successful are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the three hatched regions 122-124 correspond to the three success ranges. In the JR image 120, areas other than the three success ranges 122 to 124 are failure ranges.

Then, when the JR effect is started, the needle image 121 starts to rotate clockwise (direction of arrow R in FIG. 62) on the liquid crystal screen 11a with the center of the JR image 120 as the rotation axis. Next, when the player performs the first stop operation at the timing when the needle image 121 exists at a position overlapping any of the three success ranges 122 to 124, the first stop operation is determined to be successful. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen 11a, the image mode of the success range to be determined in the first stop operation changes, and a message indicating that the first stop operation is successful is displayed.

If the first stop operation is successful, the hand image 121 continues to rotate clockwise. Next, when the player performs the second stop operation at the timing when the needle image 121 exists at a position overlapping one of the remaining two success ranges other than the success range that was successful in the first stop operation, the second stop operation is performed. The stop operation is determined to be successful. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen 11a, the image mode of the success range to be determined by the second stop operation is changed, and a message indicating that the second stop operation is successful is displayed.

If the second stop operation is successful, the hand image 121 continues to rotate clockwise. Next, at the timing when the needle image 121 exists at a position overlapping the remaining one success range other than the two success ranges that were successful in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the player performs the third stop operation. When this is done, the third stop operation is determined to be successful. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen 11a, the image mode of the success range to be determined by the third stop operation changes, and a message indicating that the third stop operation is successful, that is, a message of JR success is displayed. .. Then, after it is determined that JR is successful, a predetermined privilege is given to the player.

If the player performs the stop operation at the timing when the needle image 121 exists at a position that does not overlap with the remaining success range at each stop operation, the stop operation is determined to be a failure, and at that time. The JR production ends with. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen 11a, the rotation operation of the needle image 121 is stopped, and a message of JR failure is displayed. For example, if it is determined that the JR effect has failed during the first stop operation, the JR effect ends at that point, and the JR effect does not occur in the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the three success ranges 122 to 124 are defined by the number of frames of the image displayed from the start of the JR effect. That is, if the player performs a stop operation of the main reel between the start frame and the final frame defined in each success range, it is determined that JR is successful. The present invention is not limited to this, and each success range may be defined by time. In this case, the timing of the stop operation is managed by the timer. Further, the arrangement positions and frame ranges of the three success ranges 122 to 124 in the JR image 120 are appropriately set according to, for example, the type of the sub-game state, the type of the internal winning combination, and the like.

(2) Contents of benefits when JR is successful Next, the contents of benefits given when JR is successful will be described.

If the JR is successful in the JR production with 7 sets in the normal BB state, an ART lottery (an opportunity to win the ART) will be given as a privilege. Then, when the ART lottery at the time of JR success is won, the ART loop mode lottery is performed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the JR effect is executed in one game period in the BB state of 7 sets in the normal state is limited to the number of times until the maximum number of successful JR times is 3. Therefore, if the JR production is successful and the ART is won multiple times (2 times or 3 times) in one game period in the BB state with 7 sets in the normal state, the loop mode lottery of the ART is performed for each win (. Redetermine the loop mode for each ART win).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the ART is won once in one game period in a BB state in which 7 lines are normally set, the JR effect may not be generated thereafter, or in the remaining JR effect. The configuration may be such that an additional number of ART games is given as a privilege. Further, in the present embodiment, if the ART is not won in the next JR production after winning the ART lottery at the time of JR success in one game period in the BB state with 7 sets in the normal state, the ART winning is determined. And do not rewrite the lottery results.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the number of times the JR effect is executed in one game period in the BB state of 7 sets in the normal state may be unlimited. In this case, the winning probability of the JR production in the situation where the number of successful JR productions is 3 or more is made much smaller than the winning probability of the JR production in the situation where the number of successful JR productions is less than 3 times. , The ART winning probability in the JR production in the situation where the number of JR successes is 3 or more is made much smaller than the ART winning probability in the JR production in the situation where the number of JR successes is less than 3.

On the other hand, if JR is successful in the JR production in the 7-matched BB state or the premium BB state during ART, a predetermined number of additional ART games (any of 5, 10 and 30 games) is given as a privilege. In addition, in the 7-matched BB state or the premium BB state during ART, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 described later, in the lottery process of the JR effect, not only the winning / non-winning of the JR effect but also the ART addition at the time of success of JR is added. The number of games is also decided at the same time.

In addition, the number of times the JR effect is executed in one game period in the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART is unlimited. However, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the JR effect in the situation where the number of JR successes is 3 times (predetermined number of times) or more in one game period in the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART is the number of JR successes. Is much smaller than that in the situation where is less than 3 times (see FIGS. 77 and 78 below). That is, if the number of successful JR games is 3 or more in one game period in the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART, it becomes difficult to win the JR effect (the JR effect is less likely to occur).

Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third stop operations are performed while the needle image 121 makes one round from the start of the JR effect, and the first to third stop operations are within the success range 122 to 124, respectively. When the JR is executed and the JR is successful, in addition to the above-mentioned privilege, the privilege that the image suggesting the setting (settings 1 to 6) of the pachislot 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 11a is also obtained.

As described above, in the JR production, when the JR is successful, the player is given a privilege related to ART, but the probability of occurrence of the JR production is not constant during the BB game period and changes according to the number of successful JR productions. However, the probability of getting benefits also changes. As a result, the game in the BB is not monotonous, and the player's interest in the game in the BB state (special game state) can be further enhanced.

(3) Suggestion effect of the number of ART additional games when JR is successful In this embodiment, when the JR effect is won in the 7-matched BB state or the premium BB state during ART, the number of ART additional games when JR is successful is 5, 10 or 30 games are determined. At this time, if the number of ART additional games at the time of winning JR success is 5 or 10, information suggesting the number of ART additional games is not displayed (notified) on the liquid crystal screen 11a, but at the time of winning JR success. When the number of ART additional games is 30 games, information suggesting the number of ART additional games is displayed (notified) on the liquid crystal screen 11a.

As a method of suggesting the number of winning ART addition games, for example, a method of displaying the number of ART addition games that can be acquired when JR is successful on the liquid crystal screen 11a, or a display mode (for example, color) of the success range in the JR image 120. Etc.) can be changed. When the effect function of suggesting (notifying) the number of ART additional games that can be acquired when JR is successful is provided, the following effects can be obtained.

As described above, the winning probability of the JR effect when the number of JR successes is 3 or more in one game period in the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART is when the number of JR successes is less than 3. It is much smaller than that (in this embodiment, it is about 1/10). That is, the number of times the JR effect is executed in one game period in the 7-matched BB state or the premium BB state during ART is basically unlimited, but it is practically the number of times until the maximum number of successful JR times is 3. Be restricted.

Therefore, in order to obtain as many ART additional games as possible in the JR production, it is preferable that the player succeeds in the JR production only in the JR production in which a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained. For example, in one game period of 7 sets of BB state or premium BB state during ART, the player intentionally fails the JR production in which the number of additional games of ART at the time of JR success is 5 or 10 games, and when JR succeeds. If it is possible to wait until the JR effect that the number of ART additional games is 30 is generated (the player intervenes in the JR effect), a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained.

Therefore, when an effect function for displaying information suggesting the number of ART addition games at the time of JR success is provided on the liquid crystal screen 11a as in the present embodiment, every time the JR effect occurs, the ART addition game at the time of JR success is provided. Since the number can be recognized by the player, the player's technical intervention in the JR production described above becomes possible. As a result, the player's interest in the JR production can be further enhanced.

(4) Deformation mode of JR effect The mode of JR effect is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and is based on a determination result of whether or not the timing of the player's stop operation is within a predetermined time range (success range). Therefore, any configuration can be made as long as a predetermined privilege is given.

For example, in the JR production, the stop operation for determining whether or not the JR is successful may be one of the first to third stop operations. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example for determining the success / failure of the stop operation for each stop operation of the player has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is summarized after the third stop operation. The configuration may be configured to determine the success / failure of the first to third stop operations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the JR effect occurs in the game in the BB state during ART, the push order navigation of the stop button may occur. In this case, in the JR effect, the number of games added to ART may be given only by performing the stop operation according to the push order navigation regardless of the timing of the stop operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing of the stop operation is not within the success range, the number of games added to ART is given.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the configuration of the JR effect generated in the premium BB state (the form of granting the privilege) is the same as the configuration of the JR effect generated in the 7-matched BB state during ART. Is not limited to this. For example, the configuration of the JR effect that occurs in the premium BB state when the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the premium BB state occurs in the premium BB state when the sub-game state shifts from the ART state to the premium BB state. It may be different from the structure of the JR production. In this case, for example, in the premium BB state when the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the premium BB state, the number of times the JR effect is executed may be limited to the number of times the JR success count reaches a maximum of three times. ..

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described.

In the lottery process using the lottery table described below, the lottery result is determined by the same process regardless of the type of the lottery table and the type of the lottery process corresponding thereto. Specifically, the lottery process is performed as follows. First, random numbers for production extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are sequentially subtracted from the lottery values specified in the lottery table. .. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery target at that time has won. In the present embodiment, the random value for the effect used in the lottery process performed by the sub-control circuit 101 is separately extracted for each type of the lottery process.

[Normal ART lottery table]
First, the normal ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the normal medium ART lottery table (to make it easier to see), the normal medium ART lottery table is divided into two tables of FIGS. 63A and 63B, but in reality, it is shown. The two tables of FIGS. 63A and 63B are configured as one table.

The normal ART lottery table is referred to when the ART lottery process (see FIG. 127 described later) is executed in the unit game in the normal state. Normally, the ART lottery table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the ART winning / non-winning lottery values set for each internal winning combination.

In the ART lottery process using the normal medium ART lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, there is a possibility of winning the ART when the internal winning combination is "middle check" or "chance lip B". , The ART winning probability is 5/32768, respectively. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility of winning the ART at the time of winning the cycle chance (when the second game lock occurs).

[Normal loop mode lottery table]
Next, the normal middle loop mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

The normal middle loop mode lottery table is referred to in the ART loop mode lottery process (see FIG. 127 described later) that is executed when the ART lottery is won in the unit game in the normal state. The normal middle loop mode lottery table defines the correspondence between each loop mode (loop modes 1 to 6) and the lottery value when each loop mode (ART continuation rate) is determined.

When the ART lottery is won in the unit game in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 64, the loop mode of the loop mode 2 or higher is determined (the loop mode 1 is not determined). At this time, for example, the loop mode 6 (loop mode in which the ART continuation rate is about 90%) is determined with a probability of 985/32768.

[FC during ART / Additional lottery table]
Next, the FC / additional lottery table during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 65A and 65B. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the FC / additional lottery table during ART (to make it easier to see), the FC / additional lottery table during ART is divided into two tables of FIGS. 65A and 65B. In practice, the two tables of FIGS. 65A and 65B are configured as one table.

The FC / additional lottery table during ART is referred to when the FC / ART game number lottery process (see FIG. 114 described later) is executed in the unit game of the ART game. The FC / additional lottery table during ART is a combination of each privilege (FC winning / non-winning and / or the number of ART additional games) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value when each privilege is determined. Specify the correspondence.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, a lottery value larger than 0 is specified for each privilege only when the internal winning combination is a plum lip. That is, in the present embodiment, the privilege can be obtained only when the plum lip is won in the unit game of the ART game. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration of the FC / additional lottery table during ART may be configured so that benefits can be obtained even in the internal winning combination other than the plum lip.

In the FC / ART game number lottery process using the FC / additional lottery table during ART, as shown in FIG. 65A, when the internal winning combination is Plumlip, only the FC winning is determined as a privilege with a probability of 5/32768. .. Further, in this case, both the FC winning and the number of ART additional games (any of 10 to 30 games) are determined as benefits with a probability of 5/32768.

In addition, when the internal winning combination is a plum lip, as shown in FIG. 65A, in the FC / ART game number lottery process using the FC / additional lottery table during ART, there is a probability of 320/32768 that the number of ART additional games of 10 games. Only is determined as a privilege, and with a probability of 130/32768, only the number of ART-added games of 20 or 30 games is determined as a privilege. Further, in this case, with a probability of 5/32768, only the number of ART additional games of 100, 200 or 300 games is determined as a privilege.

[ART continuous lottery table]
Next, the ART continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

The ART continuous lottery table is referred to in the ART continuous lottery process (see FIG. 116 described later) performed in the first game of the FC game performed at the start of the ART set. The ART continuation lottery table defines the winning / non-winning lottery values of ART continuation set for each loop mode.

In the ART continuous lottery process using the ART continuous lottery table, when the loop mode set at that time is loop mode 1, as shown in FIG. 66, there is a probability of 10813/32768 (about 33%). It is decided to continue ART. Further, when the loop mode is loop mode 2, ART continuation is determined with a probability of 16384/32768 (50%), and when the loop mode is loop mode 3, 21626/32768 (about 66%). ART continuation is determined with the probability of. Further, when the loop mode is the loop mode 4, ART continuation is determined with a probability of 24576/32768 (75%), and when the loop mode is the loop mode 5, 26214/32768 (about 80%). ART continuation is determined with the probability of. Then, when the loop mode is the loop mode 6, ART continuation is determined with a probability of 29491/32768 (about 90%).

[Loop mode transition lottery table]
Next, the loop mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

The loop mode transition lottery table is referred to in the ART loop mode promotion lottery process (see FIG. 116 described later) performed when the ART continuous lottery performed in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set is won. .. The loop mode transition lottery table is set for each loop mode (loop mode 1 to 6) of the ART currently set (this time), and each loop mode of the ART of the next set (next time) and the ART of the next set. The correspondence with the lottery value when each loop mode is determined is defined.

In the ART loop mode promotion lottery process using the loop mode transition lottery table, when the loop mode this time is loop mode 1, as shown in FIG. 67, as the next loop mode, any of loop modes 1 to 6 is performed. Is decided. If the current loop mode is loop mode 2, one of loop modes 2 to 6 is determined as the next loop mode, and if the current loop mode is loop mode 3, the next loop mode is determined. As the loop mode, any of loop modes 3 to 6 is determined. Further, when the current loop mode is the loop mode 4, one of the loop modes 4 to 6 is determined as the next loop mode, and when the current loop mode is the loop mode 5, the next loop mode is determined. As the loop mode, loop mode 5 or 6 is determined. Then, when the current loop mode is the loop mode 6, the loop mode 6 is maintained as the next loop mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to continue ART, the loop mode of ART of the next set is set to the same loop mode as the loop mode of ART of the current set (this time) (maintaining the status quo), or is present. Shift (promote) to the loop mode with an ART continuation rate higher than the ART continuation rate of the set (this time) loop mode.

[ART latent lottery table]
Next, the ART latent lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

The ART latent lottery table is referred to in the ART latent lottery process (see FIG. 116 described later) performed when the ART continuous lottery performed in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set is won. However, as described with reference to FIG. 49, in the 15th consecutive ART, the ART latent lottery process is not performed even if the ART continuous lottery is won at the start of the set.

The ART latent lottery table defines the correspondence between the latent winning / non-winning (lottery result) and the lottery value when each lottery result is determined. Then, in the ART latent lottery process using the ART latent lottery table, as shown in FIG. 68, there is a probability of 2621/32768 that the latent winning is achieved.

[Omen game number lottery table at the time of hiding]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the hiding omen game number lottery table will be described. The latent omen game number lottery table is referred to in the latent omen game number lottery process (see FIG. 116 described later) performed when the ART latent game is won.

The ART latent omen table defines the correspondence between each latent omen game number (16 games and 32 games) and the lottery value when each latent omen game number is determined. Then, in the latent omen game number lottery process using the latent omen game number lottery table, 16 games or 32 games are always determined as the latent omen game number, as shown in FIG. 69. At this time, as the number of latent precursor games, the probability that 16 games are determined and the probability that 32 games are determined are the same probability (1/2).

The type of the number of latent omen games is not limited to this example. For example, in addition to the 16 games and 32 games, the number of other latent precursor games may be selectable, or at least one of the 16 games and 32 games may be replaced with another latent precursor game number.

[FC mode lottery table]
Next, the FC mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 70A and 70B. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the FC mode lottery table (to make it easier to see), the FC mode lottery table is divided into two tables of FIGS. 70A and 70B, but in reality, FIG. 70A is shown. And the two tables in FIG. 70B are configured as one table.

The FC mode lottery table is referred to when the FC mode lottery process (see FIG. 115 described later) is executed in the start game (first game) of the FC game period. The FC mode lottery table defines the correspondence between each FC mode (FC mode 1 to 5) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value when each FC mode is determined.

For example, in the FC mode lottery process using the FC mode lottery table, when the internal winning combination is a plum lip, as shown in FIG. 70A, FC mode 2 is determined as the FC mode with a probability of 8192/32768, and 4096 / FC mode 3 or 4 is determined with a probability of 32768, and FC mode 5 is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is a plum lip, FC mode 1 is not determined as the FC mode.

[FC game number addition lottery table]
Next, the FC game number addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 71A and 71B, and FIGS. 72A and 72B. 71A and 71B are FC game number addition lottery tables that are referred to when FC mode 1 is set, and FIGS. 72A and 72B are referred to when FC mode 2 is set. FC game number addition lottery table.

Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the FC game number addition lottery table in each FC mode (to make it easier to see), each FC game number addition lottery table is divided into two tables, but in reality, it is shown. , These two tables are configured as one table. Further, in the present embodiment, the FC game number addition lottery tables corresponding to each of the FC modes 3 to 5 are provided, but here, in order to simplify the explanation, the FC game number addition lottery tables are provided. The illustration is omitted.

The FC game number addition lottery table is referred to when the FC game number addition lottery process (see FIG. 115 described later) is executed in the unit game in the FC game state. The FC game number addition lottery table includes the number of FC addition games (0, 5, 10, 15 or 20 games) set for each internal winning combination, and the lottery value when each FC addition game number is determined. Prescribe the correspondence of.

In the FC game number addition lottery process using the FC game number addition lottery table, when FC mode 1 is set and the internal winning combination is chance lip B, 5 games are played as shown in FIG. 71A. The number of FC addition games is always determined. If FC mode 1 is set and the internal winning combination is a combination other than Chance Lip B, the number of FC games is not added (added) (the number of FC addition games of 0 games is Must be decided).

Further, in the FC game number addition lottery process using the FC game number addition lottery table, when FC mode 2 is set and the internal winning combination is Bell Lip, as shown in FIG. 72A, the FC game The addition (addition) of the number is decided. Then, in this case, the number of FC addition games of 5 games is determined with the probability of 16384/32768, the number of FC addition games of 10 games is determined with the probability of 8192/32768, and the number of FC addition games of 15 or 20 games is determined with the probability of 4096/32768. The number of FC addition games is determined. If FC mode 2 is set and the internal winning combination is plum lip, chance lip A, common bell, push order bell, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak che or strong che, 1024/32768. The number of FC addition games of 5 games is determined with the probability of. In cases other than these cases, the number of FC games is not added (the number of FC addition games of 0 games is always determined).

[Additional lottery table in FC]
Next, the additional lottery table in FC will be described with reference to FIGS. 73A and 73B, 74A and 74B, and 75A and 75B. It should be noted that FIGS. 73A and 73B are additional lottery tables in FC that are referred to when FC mode 1 is set, and FIGS. 74A and 74B are referred to when FC mode 2 is set. It is an additional lottery table in FC. Further, FIGS. 75A and 75B are FC medium addition lottery tables that are referred to when the FC mode 5 is set.

Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the FC middle addition lottery table in each FC mode (to make it easier to see), each FC middle addition lottery table is divided into two tables, but in reality, this is shown. The two tables are configured as one table. Further, in the present embodiment, the corresponding FC middle addition lottery tables are provided for each of the FC modes 3 and 4, but here, in order to simplify the explanation, the FC middle addition lottery tables are not shown. Omit.

The FC middle addition lottery table is referred to when the ART game number addition lottery process (see FIG. 115 described later) is executed in the unit game in the FC game state. In the FC middle addition lottery table, the number of each ART addition game (0, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200 or 300 games) set for each internal winning combination and the number of each ART addition game are determined. The correspondence with the lottery value at the time of being played is specified.

In the ART game number addition lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, the FC mode is FC mode 1, and the internal winning combination is lost, bell lip, chance lip A, common bell, push order bell, weak che or strong. In the case of Choi, as shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the number of ART-added games of 5, 10, 20 or 30 games can be obtained. Further, when the FC mode is the FC mode 1 and the internal winning combination is the chance lip B, the number of ART additional games of 10, 20, 30 or 50 games can be obtained. If the FC mode is FC mode 1 and the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, or a medium-sized watermelon, an ART of 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200, or 300 games is added. You can get the number of games. When the FC mode is the FC mode 1 and the internal winning combination is the plum lip, the number of ART additional games of 5 games can be obtained.

As described above, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, when the FC mode is FC mode 1, the internal winning is excluded except for the rare role related to the weak watermelon, the strong watermelon, or the middle cheek. If the role is Chance Lip B, there is a possibility that a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained. Further, when the FC mode is FC mode 1 and the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, or a medium-sized watermelon, there is a possibility that 100 or more ART additional games can be obtained by one lottery. In FC mode 1, when the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon and the number of ART additional games of 100 or more games is determined by one lottery, the above-mentioned special effect during FC is performed.

In addition, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, the FC mode is FC mode 2, and the internal winning combination is lost, plum lip, chance lip A, common bell, push order bell, weak che, or In the case of a strong check, as shown in FIGS. 74A and 74B, the number of ART additional games of 5, 10, 20 or 30 games can be obtained. Further, when the FC mode is the FC mode 2 and the internal winning combination is the bell lip, the number of ART additional games of 10, 20, 30 or 50 games can be obtained. If the FC mode is FC mode 2 and the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, or a medium-sized watermelon, the ART of 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200, or 300 games is added. You can get the number of games. When the FC mode is the FC mode 2 and the internal winning combination is the chance lip B, the number of ART additional games of 5 games can be obtained.

As described above, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, when the FC mode is FC mode 2, the internal winning is excluded except for the rare role related to the weak watermelon, the strong watermelon, or the middle cheek. It is possible to get more ART extra games when the role is Bell Lip. In addition, when the FC mode is FC mode 2 and the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, or a rare role related to a medium-sized watermelon, it is possible to obtain 100 or more ART additional games in one lottery. There is sex. In the FC mode 2, when the internal winning combination is a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon and the number of ART additional games of 100 or more games is determined by one lottery, the above-mentioned special effect during FC is performed.

Further, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, when the FC mode is FC mode 5 and the internal winning combination is a combination other than the weak check, it is shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B. As described above, the number of ART additional games of 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200 or 300 games can be obtained. Further, when the FC mode is the FC mode 5 and the internal winning combination is a weak check, the number of ART additional games of 20, 30, 50, 100, 200 or 300 games can be obtained. That is, in the present embodiment, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, when the FC mode is FC mode 5, the number of ART addition games of 100 games or more is increased regardless of the internal winning combination. May be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the FC mode is FC mode 5 and the internal winning combination is weak, the probability that the number of ART additional games of 100 games or more can be obtained is that the FC mode is FC mode 5. Moreover, it is higher than that when the internal winning combination is a role other than weak Choi. That is, in the present embodiment, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, when the FC mode is FC mode 5, more ART additions are made when the internal winning combination is weak. The number of games may be obtained.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the ART game number lottery process using the FC middle addition lottery table, ART addition of 5 or more games is added for each game regardless of the type of FC mode and the type of internal winning combination. The structure is such that the number of games can be obtained.

As is clear from the FC game number addition lottery table and the FC medium addition lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, more ARTs are used in the ART game number addition lottery for each type of FC mode. The number of additional games can be obtained, and the number of FC games is always added (added) in the FC game number addition lottery. Predetermined internal winning combination (excluding weak watermelon, strong watermelon, or rare role related to medium cheek) ) Is associated.

Specifically, when the FC mode is FC mode 1, the chance lip B is associated with this predetermined internal winning combination, and when the chance lip B wins internally, in the ART game number addition lottery. A larger number of ART additional games can be obtained, and the addition of the number of FC games is always determined in the lottery for adding the number of FC games. Further, when the FC mode is FC mode 2, the bell lip is associated as a predetermined internal winning combination, and when the bell lip wins internally, a larger number of ART additional games is added in the ART game number addition lottery. The number of FC games can be obtained, and the number of FC games is always determined in the lottery for adding the number of FC games. Further, for example, when the FC mode is the FC mode 5, the corresponding predetermined internal winning combination is weak.

Further, although not shown, even when the FC mode is FC mode 3 or 4, a larger number of ART additional games can be obtained in the ART game number addition lottery, and FC is always obtained in the FC game number addition lottery. A predetermined internal winning combination for which the addition of the number of games is determined is associated with each other. The correspondence between the FC mode and the predetermined internal winning combination is not limited to this example, and can be set arbitrarily. In this way, by associating the FC mode set in the FC game with the predetermined internal winning combination, the player's interest in the FC game can be further enhanced.

[7 sets BB (normal) medium JR lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a JR lottery table in 7 sets of BB (normal) will be described.

In the 7-match BB (normal) middle JR lottery table, the JR lottery process (see FIG. 112 described later) is executed in the unit game of the normal middle 7-match BB state (normal middle red 7BB state or normal middle blue 7BB state). Referenced when. The JR lottery table in the 7-matched BB (normal) defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the JR effect and the lottery value when the winning / non-winning of the JR effect is determined.

As shown in FIG. 76, the probability of winning the JR effect (occurrence rate of the JR effect) in the JR lottery process performed every game in the normal 7-match BB state (normal medium red 7BB state or normal medium blue 7BB state). It becomes 11000/32768.

[JR lottery table in 7 sets BB (ART)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the JR lottery table in the 7-set BB (ART) will be described.

In the 7-matched BB (ART) JR lottery table, the JR lottery process (see FIG. 112 described later) is executed in the unit game of the 7-matched BB state (ART medium red 7BB state or ART medium blue 7BB state). Referenced when. The JR lottery table in 7 sets of BB (ART) shows the number of non-winning JR productions and various ART addition games (5, 10 or 30 games) when the current number of successful JR trains is less than 3 times. And, the correspondence relationship with the lottery value when each of the non-winning of the JR production and the number of various ART additional games at the time of winning the JR production is determined is defined. In addition, the JR lottery table in 7 sets of BB (ART) shows the number of games (5, 10 or 30) added to the JR production non-winning and the JR production winning games when the current number of successful JR trains is 3 or more. The correspondence between the game) and the lottery value when each of the non-winning of the JR production and the number of various ART additional games at the time of winning the JR production is determined is defined.

In the JR lottery process that is performed every game in the 7-matched BB state during ART (7BB state during ART or 7BB state during ART), the probability of winning the JR production in the situation where the number of successful JR is less than 3 times (JR production) Incidence rate) is (5000 + 5000 + 1000) / 32768 as shown in FIG. 77. At this time, the probability that the number of ART additional games of 5 or 10 games will be determined when JR is successful is 5000/32768, and the probability that the number of ART additional games of 30 games will be determined when JR is successful is 1000/32768. Become.

In addition, in the JR lottery process performed every game in the 7-match BB state during ART, the probability of winning the JR effect (occurrence rate of the JR effect) in the situation where the number of successful JR is 3 or more is (500 + 500 + 100) / 32768. Become. At this time, the probability that the number of ART additional games of 5 or 10 games will be determined when JR is successful is 500/32768, and the probability that the number of ART additional games of 30 games will be determined when JR is successful is 100/32768. Become. That is, the winning probability of the JR effect when the number of JR successes is 3 or more is very small (about 1/10) as compared with the case where the number of JR successes is less than 3, and the number of JR successes is 3. In the situation where the number of times is more than that, the JR effect is less likely to occur.

[JR lottery table in premium BB]
Next, the JR lottery table in the premium BB will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

The JR lottery table in the premium BB is referred to when the JR lottery process (see FIG. 112 described later) is executed in the unit game in the premium BB state. The JR lottery table in Premium BB shows the number of non-winning JR productions and various ART addition games (5, 10 or 30 games) at the time of winning the JR production when the current number of successful JRs is less than 3 times, and the JR production. It defines the correspondence with the lottery value when each of the number of games added to various ARTs at the time of non-winning and JR production winning is determined. In addition, the JR lottery table in the premium BB shows the number of games (5, 10 or 30 games) added to the non-winning of the JR production and the winning of the JR production when the current number of successful JR is 3 or more. It defines the correspondence with the lottery value when each of the non-winning of the JR production and the number of various ART additional games at the time of winning the JR production is determined.

In the present embodiment, the JR lottery table in the premium BB has the same configuration as the JR lottery table in the 7-set BB (ART) described above (see FIG. 77). Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery value at the time when each of the non-winning of the JR effect and the number of various ART addition games at the time of winning the JR effect, which is defined in the JR lottery table in the premium BB, is also described above. It is the same as those of the JR lottery table (see FIG. 77) in the 7-set BB (ART). The present invention is not limited to this, and various lottery values defined in the JR lottery table in the premium BB may be different from those in the JR lottery table in the 7-set BB (ART).

[7 sets BB (normal) medium ART lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the ART lottery table in 7 sets of BB (normal) will be described.

The 7-matched BB (normal) medium ART lottery table is a JR successful ART that is performed when the JR effect generated in the unit game of the normal medium 7-matched BB state (normal medium red 7BB state or normal medium blue 7BB state) is successful. It is referred to in the lottery process (see FIG. 125 described later). The ART lottery table in the 7-matched BB (normal) shows the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the ART and the lottery value when the winning / non-winning of the ART is determined, according to the type of the 7-matched BB state (normal). It is specified for each combination of the normal middle red 7BB state or the normal middle blue 7BB state) and the type of rush mode (rush modes A to D).

In the ART lottery process at the time of JR success using the 7-matched BB (normal) medium ART lottery table, which is usually performed in the game (BB game) in the red 7BB state, if the rush mode is the rush mode A, the ART wins. As shown in FIG. 79, the probability that is determined (rush rate) is 19661/32768 (about 60%), and when the rush mode is the rush mode B, the probability that the ART winning is determined (rush rate). ) Is 14745/32768 (about 45%). Further, in the normal middle red 7BB state, when the rush mode is the rush mode C, the probability that the ART winning is determined (rush rate) is 7856/32768 (about 24%), and the rush mode is the rush mode D. In the case of, the probability (rush rate) that the ART winning is determined is 3277/32768 (about 10%).

In the ART lottery process at the time of JR success using the 7-matched BB (normal) medium ART lottery table, which is usually performed in the game (BB game) in the middle blue 7BB state, if the rush mode is the rush mode A, the ART wins. As shown in FIG. 79, the probability that is determined (rush rate) is 26215/32768 (about 80%), and when the rush mode is the rush mode B, the probability that the ART winning is determined (rush rate). ) Is 18023/32768 (about 55%). Further, in the normal middle blue 7BB state, when the rush mode is the rush mode C, the probability (rush rate) that the ART winning is determined is 11797/32768 (about 36%), and the rush mode is the rush mode D. In this case, the probability (rush rate) of determining the ART winning is 5898/32768 (about 18%).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in each rush mode, the rush rate to ART in the normal middle blue 7BB state is higher than that in the normal middle red 7BB state.

[7 sets BB (normal) medium loop mode lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a 7-set BB (normal) middle loop mode lottery table will be described.

The 7-match BB (normal) medium loop mode lottery table succeeds in the JR production generated in the unit game of the normal medium 7-match BB state (normal medium red 7BB state or normal medium blue 7BB state), and wins the ART lottery. It is referred to in the ART loop mode lottery process (see FIG. 129 described later) performed when the above is performed. The 7-match BB (normal) medium loop mode lottery table shows the correspondence between each loop mode (loop modes 1 to 6) and the lottery value when each loop mode is determined, and the type of the 7-match BB state during normal. It is specified for each combination of (normal middle red 7BB state or normal middle blue 7BB state) and the type of rush mode (rush modes A to D).

In the ART loop mode lottery process at the time of JR success using the 7-match BB (normal) middle loop mode lottery table, which is performed in the game (BB game) in the normal middle red 7BB state or the normal middle blue 7BB state, the rush mode rushes. In the case of mode A, as shown in FIG. 80, one of loop mode 1 to loop mode 6 is determined (the ART continuation rate is about 33% to 90%). Further, in the ART loop mode lottery process when JR is successful, when the rush mode is the rush mode B, one of the loop mode 2 to the loop mode 6 is determined (ART continuation rate is about 50% to 90). %).

In addition, in the ART loop mode lottery process at the time of JR success using the 7-match BB (normal) middle loop mode lottery table performed in the game (BB game) in the normal middle red 7BB state or the normal middle blue 7BB state, the rush mode When is the entry mode C, one of the loop mode 4 to the loop mode 6 is determined (the ART continuation rate is about 75% to 90%). Further, in the ART loop mode lottery process when JR is successful, when the entry mode is the entry mode D, the loop mode 6 is always determined (the ART continuation rate is about 90%).

As is clear from FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, for example, the probability that the loop mode 6 is determined in the normal middle blue 7BB state is higher than the probability that the loop mode 6 is determined in the normal middle red 7BB state. Is set to.

[7 sets BB (ART) medium addition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, an additional lottery table in the 7-set BB (ART) will be described.

The 7-matched BB (ART) middle-addition lottery table has a lottery process for the number of ART-additional games (see FIG. 112 below) in the unit game of the 7-matched BB state during ART (red 7BB state during ART or blue 7BB state during ART). Referenced when executed. The 7-match BB (ART) medium-addition lottery table is set for each type of 7-match BB state during ART (red 7BB state during ART or blue 7BB state during ART), and the number of additional games for each ART (0, 5, 10). , 20, 50 or 100 games) and the lottery value when the number of additional games for each ART is determined.

As shown in FIG. 81, there is a probability of 1500/32768 in the ART addition game number lottery process using the 7-match BB (ART) middle-addition lottery table performed in the 7-match BB state game (BB game) during ART. The number of ART additional games for 5 games is determined. In addition, in the ART addition game number lottery process performed in the 7-match BB state game during ART, the number of ART addition games of 10 games is determined with a probability of 150/32768, and 20, 50 or 100 games are determined with a probability of 2/32768. The number of additional games for ART is determined.

[Premium BB medium addition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the extra lottery table in the premium BB will be described.

The premium BB middle addition lottery table is referred to when the ART addition game number lottery process (see FIG. 112 described later) is executed in the unit game in the premium BB state. The premium BB medium addition lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of each ART addition game (0, 5, 10, 20, 50 or 100 games) and the lottery value when each ART addition game number is determined.

Number of ART addition games using the premium BB middle addition lottery table performed in the premium BB state game (BB game) In the lottery processing, as shown in FIG. 82, the number of ART addition games of 5 games has a probability of 15000/32768. Is determined. In addition, in the ART addition game number lottery process performed in the game in the premium BB state, the number of ART addition games of 10 games is determined with a probability of 1000/32768, and an ART addition of 20, 50 or 100 games is performed with a probability of 20/32768. The number of games is decided.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 107, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (power-on processing) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization process corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the main CPU 93 clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor and the start switch 79 is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the effect random value used in the game lock-related lottery process described later, and stores the extracted effect random value in the effect random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. (S5). In the present embodiment, the effect random value 1, the effect random value 2, and the effect random value 3 are provided as the effect random values. Each of the effect random values 1 to 3 is extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, and is used in the lock lottery, the lock mode transition lottery, and the replay specified number of times lottery described later.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs ART start signal output processing (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of outputting an ART start signal to the external centralized terminal plate 47 at the start of setting the ART. The details of the ART start signal output processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock-related lottery process (S8).

In the process of S8, the main CPU 93, for example, based on the internal winning combination, the winning / non-winning of the first game lock at the start of the game (when the lever is turned on) and the lock pattern at the time of the lock winning (FIGS. 37 to 37). 40) is determined by lottery. Further, in the process of S8, the main CPU 93 also performs a control-related process of the second game lock triggered by the occurrence of the cycle chance hit. The details of the game lock-related lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

In the present embodiment, lock flags 1 to 5 are provided as control flags for the lock patterns 1 to 5 of the first game lock described above, and the first game lock is won in the game lock-related lottery process of S8. In this case, the main CPU 93 sets the lock flag corresponding to the winning lock pattern to the ON state. Further, in the present embodiment, the lock flag 6 is provided as the control flag of the second game lock described above, and when the cycle chance is won at the start of the game (when the lever is turned on), the game lock-related lottery process of S8 is performed. In, the lock flag 6 is set to the on state. These lock flags are stored in the main RAM 95.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S9). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S11). In this process, the game lock at the start of the game (at the time of lever-on) corresponding to the type (lock pattern) of the game lock determined in the process of S8 is mainly executed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S12). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the main reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 107 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each main reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S15). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 47) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43). Further, in this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 11). To collate. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S17). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S16. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 11), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is nine.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S18). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command generation / storage process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a payout end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution process of the third game lock (lock for 4500 ms) performed at the end of the bonus (BB) game described above is also performed by this bonus end check process. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S21). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution process of the third game lock (lock for 10000 ms) performed at the time of winning the bonus (BB) described above is also performed by this bonus operation check process. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

When the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits the medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIGS. 3 to 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medal is inserted.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S37). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

After the processing of S32, if S35 is a NO determination or S38 is a YES determination, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is ON (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch 79 is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIGS. 3 to 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 32. Then, after the processing of S40, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and shifts the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the main game state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current main game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44), and the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 15). To determine. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery value change process (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the calculation result as a random value and adds 1 to the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

On the other hand, in S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" in each of the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current winner. Acquire the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer according to the numbers (S49).

Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 27) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Refer to FIG. 24) to acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S54).

After the processing of S54 or when the determination in S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S55).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RB gaming state (S56). When the main CPU 93 determines in S56 that it is not in the RB gaming state (when the determination in S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RB game state is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (when the determination in S56 is YES). S57). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44) to determine whether or not the RT game state flag is in the ON state (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 4 in the game state flag storage area 2. Then, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (FIG. 85). (See) to S43.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 is inside the RT corresponding to the RT game state in the ON state. With reference to the lottery table, the lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “9”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 16 to 18) for the RT0 gaming state (for general gaming state) is changed. (S62). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 85).

[ART start signal output processing]
Next, the ART start signal output processing performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT2 start flag is in the ON state (S71). The "RT2 start flag" is whether or not the current game is in the RT2 state and before the ART start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47, that is, the game during the ART operation preparation period. It is a flag for determining whether or not, and if the current game is a game during the ART operation preparation period, it is turned on. The RT2 start flag is set to the ON state when the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state in the RT control process described later (see FIG. 104 described later). Further, the RT2 start flag is stored in the main RAM 95.

In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART start signal output process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S8.

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal replay has been won (S72). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination of any of the abbreviations "F_normal lip 1" to the abbreviation "F_normal lip 4" has won.

In S72, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay has not been won (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART start signal output processing and performs the processing in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S8. On the other hand, in S72, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay has been won (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push order correct answer state value is "2" (S73). ).

The "push order correct answer state value" is the number of times the stop button is pressed according to the push order navigation of the normal replay role performed in the game during the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state) (hereinafter, "push order correct answer"). It is a value indicating the number of times of. In the ART operation preparation period, the push order correct answer state value is added by "1" each time the push order is correctly answered once when the normal replay combination is won. Therefore, for example, in the ART operation preparation period, when the push order is correct for the first time when the normal replay combination is won, the push order correct answer state value changes from "0" to "1", and then the push order of the normal replay combination is changed. When the push order is correct for the navigation, the push order correct state value changes from "1" to "2". Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the situation where the push order correct answer state value is "2", when the normal replay combination is internally won, the ART start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47. The process of updating the correct answer state value in the push order (process of adding 1) is performed in the winning search process (see FIG. 103 described later) described later.

In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order correct answer state value is not "2" (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART start signal output processing and performs the processing in the main flow (FIG. 83). See), move to S8.

On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order correct answer state value is "2" (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 outputs the ART start signal to the external centralized terminal board 47 (when the determination is YES in S73). S74). Then, after the processing of S74, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start signal output processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

In this embodiment, the ART start signal output process described above is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 outputs the ART start signal to the external centralized terminal plate 47 when the push order correct answer state value is "2" and the normal replay is won during the ART operation preparation period. It also serves as a means (external signal output means).

[Game lock related lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the game lock-related lottery process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is any of the RT0 to RT2 gaming states (S81).

In S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is not one of the RT0 to RT2 gaming states (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock-related lottery process, and the process is performed in the main flow. Move to S9 (see FIG. 83). On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is one of the RT0 to RT2 gaming states (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. (S82).

In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay combination has not been won (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later. On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay combination has won (when the determination in S82 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the remaining number of replays specified for determining the winning / non-winning of the cycle chance. Is subtracted by 1 (S83). The remaining number of winning replays is the number of remaining winnings until the number of winnings of the normal replay combination reaches the specified number of replays.

After the processing of S83, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the remaining replay specified number of times is 0 (S84).

In S84, when the main CPU 93 determines that the remaining replay specified number of times is not 0 (when the determination in S84 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock-related lottery process, and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S9.

On the other hand, in S84, when the main CPU 93 determines that the remaining replay specified number of times is 0 (when S84 is YES determination), that is, when the cycle chance is won, the main CPU 93 performs the replay specified number of times update process. Do (S85). In this process, the lock mode transition lottery set for the second game lock triggered by the winning of the cycle chance, and the update (reset) process of the specified number of replays are mainly performed. The details of the replay specified number of times update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lock flag 6 to the ON state (S86). Then, after the processing of S86, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock-related lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

Here, returning to the processing of S82 again, when S82 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 93 plays a rare role (abbreviation "F_chance lip", "F_weak watermelon", "F_strong watermelon", "F_weak che", It is determined whether or not the winning combination (the prescribed internal winning combination) related to either “F_strong check” or “F_medium check” has been won (S87). In this determination process, a YES determination is made not only when the rare combination is won alone, but also when the rare combination and the BB combination are duplicately won.

In S87, when the main CPU 93 determines that the rare combination has not been won (when the determination in S87 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S89 described later. On the other hand, in S87, when the main CPU 93 determines that the rare combination has been won (when the determination in S87 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the replay specified number of times update process (S88). The details of the replay specified number of times update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

After the processing of S88 or when the determination in S87 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S89).

In S89, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (when the determination in S89 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock-related lottery process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S9.

On the other hand, in S89, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (when the determination in S89 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the game lock lottery table (FIGS. 38 to 38) based on the internal winning combination. (See FIG. 40), the game lock lottery is performed (S90). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock lottery has been won (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock lottery has not been won (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock related lottery process, and the process is performed in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S9. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock lottery has been won (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB combination related to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" is the single winning. Determine (S92).

In S92, when the main CPU 93 determines that the BB combination related to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" is not a single win (when the determination in S92 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S94 described later. On the other hand, in S92, when the main CPU 93 determines that the BB combination related to the abbreviation "F_BB_01" is the time of a single win (when the determination in S92 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the replay specified number of times update process (S93). .. The details of the replay specified number of times update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

After the processing of S93, or when the determination in S92 is NO, the main CPU 93 is the lock flag (any of the lock flags 1 to 5) corresponding to the lock pattern number of the winning game lock (the first game lock described above). Is set to the on state (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock-related lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

[Replay specified number of times update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the replay specified number of times update process performed in S85, S88 or S93 in the flowchart of the game lock-related lottery process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 performs a lock mode transition lottery (S101). In this process, the main CPU 93 is based on the current (this time unit game) lock mode (either "A", "B", "heaven" or "super heaven"), and the lock mode transition lottery table (FIG. 41) is referred to, and the lock mode to be set in the next and subsequent unit games is determined by lottery.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a replay specified number of times lottery process (S102). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the replay specified number of times lottery table (see FIG. 42), and based on the lock mode in the next and subsequent unit games determined in S101, the replay specified number of times that becomes the winning trigger of the cycle chance. To determine.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (replay specified number of times) of S102 to the remaining replay specified number of times (S103). By this process, the specified number of replays is reset based on the newly set lock mode when the first or second game lock is confirmed at the time of winning the rare combination or at the start of the game (when the lever is turned on). Therefore, for example, when the rare role wins, or when the first game lock is won, the number of wins of the normal replay role reaches the specified number of replays at that time (winning at the cycle chance). Even before that, the lock mode and the specified number of replays are newly set (reset).

Then, after the processing of S103, the main CPU 93 ends the replay specified number of times update processing, and returns the processing to the game lock-related lottery processing (see FIG. 88). At this time, if the replay specified number of times update process is the process of S85 in the flowchart of the game lock-related lottery process (see FIG. 88), the main CPU 93 changes the process to S86 of the game lock-related lottery process. return. Further, when the replay specified number of times update process is the process of S88 in the flowchart of the game lock-related lottery process, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S89 of the game lock-related lottery process. Further, when the replay specified number of times update process is the process of S93 in the flowchart of the game lock-related lottery process, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S94 of the game lock-related lottery process.

In the present embodiment, the process of S101 during the above-mentioned replay specified number of times update process is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 has a means for updating the lock mode at the time of winning the cycle chance (first lock mode updating means) and a means for updating the lock mode at the time of winning the rare combination (second). It also serves as a lock mode update means). Further, in the present embodiment, the processes of S102 and S103 during the above-mentioned replay specified number of times update process are executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for resetting the specified number of replays (specified number of times updating means) based on the updated lock mode.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 28), and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 83. (S111).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 29), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S112). Specifically, the main CPU 93 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in all the symbol code storage areas (see FIG. 47) (S113).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S114). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S10 of the main flow (see FIG. 83). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the game start lock process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lock flag (any of the lock flags 1 to 6) is set (S121).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S121 that the lock flag is not set (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S12. On the other hand, in S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock flag is set (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the set lock flag is the lock flag 5. (S122).

In S122, when the main CPU 93 determines that the set lock flag is not the lock flag 5 (when the determination in S122 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S124 described later. On the other hand, in S122, when the main CPU 93 determines that the set lock flag is the lock flag 5 (when the determination in S122 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state. Is determined (S123).

In S123, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S123 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S12.

On the other hand, in S123, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S123 is YES) or when the determination in S122 is NO, the main CPU 93 is set (on). The reel effect pattern (lock pattern) corresponding to the lock flag (game lock type) of the state) is set, and the lock time corresponding to the lock flag is set in the lock timer (S124). By this process, the game lock corresponding to the set lock flag is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 107, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S125). In S125, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S125 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S125 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S125, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S125 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the lock flag corresponding to the executed game lock to the off state. (S126). Then, after the processing of S126, the main CPU 93 ends the lock processing at the start of the game, and shifts the processing to S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

In this embodiment, the game start lock process described above is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (lock execution means) for generating the second game lock at the time of winning the cycle chance.

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S131). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined main reel from, for example, the rotating main reel, and determines the selected main reel as the search target reel.

For example, in S132, when all (three) main reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S141 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S132 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S141 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S132 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S133). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (S134). Then, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process (S135). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the valid line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) (S136). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each main reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped main reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, which is prepared in advance, or the stopped main reel. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 11) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each main reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S137). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. Refer to the ranking table (not shown) to acquire the pull-in priority data.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) (S138). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S139). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S140).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S140 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S140 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S135 and repeats the processes after S135.

On the other hand, in S140, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S140 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S141).

When it is determined in S141 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S132 and repeats the processes after S132. On the other hand, in S141, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S15 of the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S133 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 92) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S9) (S151). ). When the main CPU 93 determines in S151 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S151 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process is transferred to S134 (see FIG. 92).

On the other hand, in S151, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table number is not set (when the determination in S151 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 45) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S152). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S134 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 92).

In S152, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the symbol code storage process performed in S135 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 92) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S161). In the present embodiment, as the effective line (winning determination line), one line (center line) is provided as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S162). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S163). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S136 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 92).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the reel stop control process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S171). In S171, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S171 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S171 to execute the effective stop button pressing operation. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S171, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 45) is updated (S172). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S173).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S174). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S175).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S176). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S177). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of the main reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S176, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 95 (S178). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S178 as the search symbol position (S179). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 94 (S180). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) using the acquired symbol code (S181).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S182). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S183). In S183, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S183 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S183 until the pressed stop button is released. stand by.

On the other hand, in S183, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S183 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S184). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The data structure of the reel stop command generated in this process is the same as that of the reel stop command generated in S177. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command generated in S184 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command generated in S177.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S185). In S185, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S185 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 92 (S186). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S171 and repeats the processes after S171.

On the other hand, in S185, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S185 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 83). (See) to S16.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the slip piece number determination process performed in S176 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S191). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 19C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00010000" in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data as the line mask data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 19R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S192). When the main CPU 93 determines in S192 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S192 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S193). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S201 described later.

On the other hand, in S192, when the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S192 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S194).

In S194, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S194 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S195). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 29). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S196). After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S201 described later.

On the other hand, in S194, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S194 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S197). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 29).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S198). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S199). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S200).

After the processing of S193, S196 or S200, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S201). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S177 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 95).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the second and third stop processes performed in S193 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S211). When the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S214 described later.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 pushes the stop buttons forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S212). When the main CPU 93 determines in S212 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S212 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S214 described later.

On the other hand, in S212, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S212 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process (S213). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

After the processing of S213, or when S211 or S212 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 93 performs the line mask data change processing (S214). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number search process (S215). In this process, the number of sliding pieces determination data is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 30, 32 and 33).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 93 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S215, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S201 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the line change bit performed in S198 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 96) and S213 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 97). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S221). In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S222). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S222, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is performed in S199 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96) or the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 97). The process proceeds to S214.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S223). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 32 and 33), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S223 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. After completion, the process is transferred to S199 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 96) or S214 of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 97).

On the other hand, in S223, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S223 is YES), the main CPU 93 is B. Set the line status (S224). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is performed in S199 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96) or the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 97). The process proceeds to S214.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the line mask data performed in S199 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 96) and S214 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 97). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S231). The C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 102) described later.

In S231, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S232).

In S232, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S233). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S233 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 32) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S233, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is performed in S200 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96) or the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 97). The process proceeds to S215.

On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S232 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice (when the determination is NO). S234). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button by pressing forward, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the processing of S234. As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S234, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is performed in S200 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96) or the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 97). The process proceeds to S215.

Further, in S231, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S235). .. When the main CPU 93 determines in S235 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S235 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. The process moves to S200 of (see 96) or S215 of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 97).

On the other hand, in S235, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S235 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S236). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 32 and 33) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S236, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is performed in S200 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 96) or the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 97). The process proceeds to S215.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the priority pull-in control process performed in S201 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the search order table (see FIG. 35) (S241). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S242). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value in the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S243).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S244). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S245).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S245 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S246). In S246, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S245 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S246 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S248 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S246, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S245 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S246 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips acquired in S244. The number of pieces is evacuated (S247).

Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S248).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S249). When the main CPU 93 determines in S249 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S249 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S244 and repeats the processes after S244.

On the other hand, in S249, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S249 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S250). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 96).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the control change process performed in S182 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S261). In S261, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S261 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and performs the process in S183 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 95). Move to.

On the other hand, in S261, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S261 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S262). When the main CPU 93 determines in S262 that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S262 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the control process after the second stop (S263). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 95).

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S262 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S264). When the main CPU 93 determines in S264 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S264 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S183 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 95).

On the other hand, in S264, when the main CPU 93 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S264 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 31). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S265).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the scheduled stop position (S266). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S267).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S267 matches the scheduled stop position (S268). In S268, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S268 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S269). In S269, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S269 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S267 and repeats the processes after S267.

On the other hand, in S269, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S269 is YES), the main CPU 93 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S270).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S271). Then, after the processing of S271, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 95).

Further, in S268, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S268 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the second when the line is pushed forward according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S272).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S273). Then, after the processing of S273, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 95).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the second post-stop control change process performed in S263 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 101) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S281). When the main CPU 93 determines in S281 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S281 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 101). ..

On the other hand, in S281, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 is pushing forward (when the determination in S281 is YES), whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not in the main CPU 93. (S282). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S272 of the control change process (see FIG. 101). Then, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. (See 101) also ends.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S283). In S283, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S283 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 101) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S283, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is ON (when the determination in S283 is YES), the main CPU 93 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S284). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S285). Then, after the process of S285, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 101).

[Prize search process]
Next, the winning search process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. 103.

First, the main CPU 93 performs a determination process of a winning combination (display combination) (S291). Specifically, the main CPU 93 collates the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line with the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 11), and determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line. , And the type of winning combination is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT2 start flag is in the ON state (S292). In S292, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the winning search process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move.

On the other hand, in S292, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal replay is won in the game ( S293). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination of any of the abbreviations "F_normal lip 1" to the abbreviation "F_normal lip 4" has won.

In S293, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay has not been won (when the determination in S293 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the winning search process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move. On the other hand, in S293, when the main CPU 93 determines that the normal replay has been won (when the determination in S293 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push order correct answer state value is "2" (S294). ).

In S294, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order correct answer state value is "2" (when the determination in S294 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S297 described later.

On the other hand, in S294, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order correct answer state value is not "2" (when S294 is a NO determination), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal replay is won and the push order is correct. Is determined (S295). Specifically, the main CPU 93 refers to the result of the winning combination determination process of S291 and the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46), and the normal replay wins, and the pressing order of the stop button wins. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the type of normal replay performed (see FIG. 50).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S295 that the determination condition of S295 is not satisfied (when the determination in S295 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the winning search process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move. On the other hand, in S295, when the main CPU 93 determines that the determination condition of S295 is satisfied (when the determination in S295 is YES), the main CPU 93 adds "1" to the push order correct answer state value (S296). Then, after the processing of S296, the main CPU 93 ends the winning search processing, and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

Here, returning to the process of S294 again, if S294 is a YES determination, the main CPU 93 sets "0" to the push order correct answer value (S297).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock command generation / storage process (S298). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates lock command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The lock command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. Then, on the sub side, the notification effect of starting ART is started with the reception of this lock command as a trigger. The lock command is configured to include, for example, information indicating the occurrence of a lock, a lock time, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined lock time corresponding to the above-described fourth game lock (weight) generated in the unit game at the time of outputting the ART start signal in the lock timer (S299). By this process, the above-mentioned fourth game lock is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 107, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S300).

In S300, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not "0" (when the determination in S300 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S300 until the value of the lock timer becomes "0". stand by. During the period in which the process of S300 is repeated, the ART start notification effect is executed on the sub side.

On the other hand, in S300, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S300 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 start flag to the off state and sets the RT2 middle flag. Set to the on state (S301). The "RT2 middle flag" indicates whether or not the current game is a game in the RT2 gaming state after the ART start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47, that is, whether or not the game is in the ART state. It is a flag for discriminating. The RT2 flag is stored in the main RAM 95. Then, after the processing of S301, the main CPU 93 ends the winning search process and shifts the processing to S17 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

In the present embodiment, the processes of S295 and S296 during the winning search process are executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 wins the normal replay combination (predetermined combination) in the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state), and information on the stop operation related to the winning of the normal replay combination. It also serves as a means for counting the number of times the stop operation is performed according to the above (correct answer number counting means). Further, the processing of S299 and S300 during the winning search processing is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 wins the normal replay combination (predetermined combination) in the state where the push order correct answer state value is "2", the fourth game lock is performed after all the reels are stopped. It also serves as a means (lock execution means) for generating (weight).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (special game determining means) for determining the transition to the BB gaming state at the time of winning (operating) the BB winning combination.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 14) and checks the transition conditions of the RT game state (end condition and activation condition of the RT game state) that can be established in the current (transition source) RT game state. (S311).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S312). In S312, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S320 described later.

On the other hand, in S312, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 14) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S313).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S314). In S314, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT2 gaming state (YES in S314), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT2 flag is on (S315). ).

If the BB game in the BB state during ART is completed, and then the RT2 game state (ART state) is returned to the RT2 game state (ART state) again through the RT0 and RT1 game states, S315 is determined to be YES. If the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state in the other transition process, S315 is determined as NO.

In S315, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 flag is in the ON state (YES in S315), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S320 described later.

On the other hand, in S315, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 middle flag is not in the ON state (NO in S315), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 start flag to the ON state (S316). Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" to the push order correct answer state value (S317). Then, after the processing of S317, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S320 described later.

Here, returning to the process of S314 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S314 that the RT gaming state has not shifted to the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 93 is in the RT gaming state. Determines whether or not the RT2 gaming state has transitioned to the RT0 or RT1 gaming state (S318).

In S318, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 or RT1 gaming state (when the determination in S318 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S320 described later. On the other hand, in S318, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 or RT1 gaming state (when the determination in S318 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 middle flag to the off state (S319). ..

After the processing of S317 or S319, if S312 or S318 determines NO, or if S315 determines YES, the main CPU 93 performs the display command generation / storage process (S320). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for display commands to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S320, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

In the present embodiment, the processes of S314 to S317 during the RT control process are executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 shifts the sub-game state to the ART operation preparation period state (transition preparation state) when the transition to the RT2 game state (shift to the ART game) is determined. It also serves as a means (transition control means) for performing a process for causing the operation (setting the RT2 start flag to the ON state).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. 105.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB (BB according to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44). (S331). When the main CPU 93 determines in S331 that the BB is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 83). ..

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that the BB is operating (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end command generation and storage process (S333). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lock time (4500 ms) corresponding to the game lock (third game lock described above) performed at the end of the BB in the lock timer (S334). By this process, the game lock at the end of BB is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 107, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S335).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S335 that the value of the lock timer is not "0" (when the determination in S335 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S335 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S335, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S335 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing (S336). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and sets the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating BB to the off state. If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds the predetermined number (297 or 144) during the BB game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S337). Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

Here, returning to the process of S332 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S332 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 is the winning count counter. And each value of the playable number counter is updated (S338). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" for one unit game regardless of the stop symbol. Is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S339). In S339, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S339 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

On the other hand, in S339, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S339 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at the end of RB. (S340). Specifically, processing such as setting the RB game status flag to the off state, clearing the values of the winning counter and the game counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. 106.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB (BB according to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09") is operating (S351). In S351, when the main CPU 93 determines that the BB is not operating (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S354 described later.

On the other hand, in S351, when the main CPU 93 determines that the BB is operating (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S352). In S352, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RB is operating (when the determination in S352 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S2 in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move.

On the other hand, in S352, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RB is not operating (when the determination in S352 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the RB operating processing based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 12). (S353). Then, after the processing of S353, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

Further, when the determination in S351 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S354). In the present embodiment, the display on the effective line of the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combination names "C_BB_01" to "C_BB_09" is defined as the winning of the bonus game. In S354, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S354 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S360 described later.

On the other hand, in S354, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S354 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 12). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S355). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 12), and sets the bonus end number counter. The numerical value is set to a predetermined value (“297” or “144”). Further, in this process, the RB operating process described in S353 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S356). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S357). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 107. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lock time (10000 ms) corresponding to the game lock (third game lock described above) performed at the time of winning the BB in the lock timer (S358). By this process, the game lock at the time of BB winning is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 107, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S359).

In S359, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S359 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S359 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by. On the other hand, in S359, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S359 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 83), move to S2.

Further, when the determination in S354 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S360). In S360, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S360 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 83). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S360, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S360 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S361). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S361, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 83).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an interrupt process that is periodically executed at 1.1172 msec intervals under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S371). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S372). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch of the stop switch board 80 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S373). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S374). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S375). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the main reels are requested to start rotating, and then each main reel rotates at a constant speed. In addition, three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding main reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4), and then corresponds to the corresponding value. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the main reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S375, in addition to the normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing of the main reel, when the game lock is set, the main CPU 93 is set to the type of the game lock. It also controls the corresponding lock and reel effect (reel action).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S376). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S377). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 133, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S401). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S402).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S403). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the process of S403, if the received command type code is any one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than the plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S403 that the command type is not normal (when the determination in S403 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S401 and repeats the processes after S401.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S403 that the command type is normal (when the determination in S403 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S404). .. The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S404, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S401 and repeats the processing after S401.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

First, the sub CPU 102 retrieves a message from the message queue (S411). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S412). In S412, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S412 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S415 described later.

On the other hand, in S412, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S412 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S413). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the animation data (S415). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the sound data (S416). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the lamp data (S417). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S414. After the processing of S417, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S411 and repeats the processing after S411.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the effect content determination process performed in S414 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command is received (S421).

In S421, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S421), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S422). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts various random values for the effect, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S423). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data or the like is determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S423, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S421, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S421 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S424).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S424 that the reel stop command is being received (when the determination in S424 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S425). At the time of winning the JR effect, in this process, it is determined whether or not the stop operation of each main reel by the player is successful. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S426). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109). In the process of S426, the current game is a game during the ART operation preparation period, and a unit game in which the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 (normally, the replay role is followed twice by the push order navigation). , In the case of a unit game that wins the next normal replay role after correctly answering the push order navigation twice), every time a reel stop command is received, an ART prize is awarded on the effective line for directing the corresponding liquid crystal sub reel. The effect data that enables the stop display of the specific liquid crystal symbol is registered.

On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S424 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S427).

In S427, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display command is received (YES in S427), the sub CPU 102 performs the display command reception process (S428). In this process, the transition control process of the sub-game state is mainly performed when the sub-game state is the state of the RT transition preparation period (the first ART preparation flag is on). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 130 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the display command according to the registered effect number and display combination (S429). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S427, when it is determined that the display command is not received (NO in S427), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S430). In S430, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S430 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S431). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S430, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S430 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S432).

In S432, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S432 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets various related flags for BB control to the ON state and sets the number of JR successes. Set "0" (S433). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets any of the red 7BB flag, the blue 7BB flag, and the premium BB flag to the ON state based on the internal winning combination. At this time, when one of the red 7BB flag and the blue 7BB flag is set to the ON state, the sub CPU 102 also sets the BB start flag to the ON state.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for starting the bonus (S434). Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S432, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S432 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S435).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S435 that the bonus end command has been received (YES in S435), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus end command reception process (S436). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later. Then, after the processing of S436, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S435 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the lock command is received (S437).

In S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock command has been received (YES in S437), the sub CPU 102 performs the lock command reception process (S438). The details of the lock command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 described later. Then, after the processing of S438, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the lock command is received (when the determination in S437 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the no operation command is received (S439). In S439, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S439 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109). Move to.

On the other hand, in S439, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S439), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S440). The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later. Then, after the processing of S440, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S415 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 109).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S422 in the flowchart (see FIG. 110) of the effect content determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the BB state (S451). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the BB state based on the on / off states of the red 7BB flag, the blue 7BB flag, and the premium BB flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. .. The sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB state when any of these BB flags is in the ON state.

In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB state (when the determination in S451 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during BB (S452). The details of the processing during BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S452, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the BB state (when the determination in S451 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART state (S453). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART state based on the ON / OFF state of the ART flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. The sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the ART state when the ART flag is on.

In S453, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the ART state (when the determination in S453 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S459 described later.

On the other hand, in S453, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the ART state (when the determination in S453 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the game in the 16th consecutive ART. Is determined (S454). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the 16th ART based on the ON / OFF state of the 16th ART flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. The sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the game in the 16th ART when the 16th ART flag is on.

In S454, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the game in the 16th ART (when the determination in S454 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S458 described later.

On the other hand, in S454, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not the game in the 16th consecutive ART (when the determination in S454 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current game is the game in the ending ART. (S455). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game during the ending ART based on the on / off state of the ending ART flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. When the ending ART flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a game during the ending ART.

In S455, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not the game in the ending ART (when the determination in S455 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during ART (S456). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. Then, after the processing of S456, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

On the other hand, in S455, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a game in the ending ART (when the determination in S455 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the ending ART (S457). The details of the processing during the ending ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. Then, after the processing of S457, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

Here, returning to the processing of S454 again, if S454 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the 16th ART (S458). The details of the processing during the 16th consecutive ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S458, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

Here, returning to the process of S453 again, when S453 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART preparation state (S459). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART preparation state based on the on / off states of the first ART preparation flag and the second ART preparation flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. The sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the ART preparation state when one of the first ART preparation flag and the second ART preparation flag is on.

In S459, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the ART preparation state (when the determination in S459 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART preparation process (S460). The details of the ART preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing of S460, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

On the other hand, in S459, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the ART ready state (when the determination in S459 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART latent state (when the sub game state is the ART latent state). S461). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the ART latent state based on the ON / OFF state of the ART latent flag managed by the sub control circuit 101. The sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the ART latent state when the ART latent flag is on.

In S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the ART latent state (when the determination in S461 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART latent processing (S462). The details of the ART latent processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. Then, after the processing of S462, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the ART latent state (when the determination in S461 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal processing (S463). The details of the normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. Then, after the processing of S463, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S464 described later.

After the processing of S452, S456, S457, S458, S460, S462 or S463, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect lottery processing (S464). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) based on various information such as, for example, the result of various lottery performed in the various processes described above, the sub-game state, the internal winning combination, and the like. Determine the production number. Then, after the processing of S464, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S423 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

[Processing during BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the BB processing performed in S452 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is the normal middle 7 BB state (normal middle red 7BB state or normal middle blue 7BB state) (S471). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is the 7-matched BB state in the normal state based on the on / off states of the red 7BB flag, the blue 7BB flag, the premium BB flag, and the normal flag. When one of the red 7BB flag and the blue 7BB flag is in the ON state and the normal flag is in the ON state, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the 7-matched BB state during the normal state.

In S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is not the 7-match BB state during normal operation (when S471 is NO determination), that is, when the sub-game state is the 7-match BB state or premium BB state during ART. , The sub CPU 102 performs the process of S478 described later.

On the other hand, in S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the BB state with 7 sets in the normal state (when the determination in S471 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines based on the on / off state of the BB start flag. It is determined whether or not the current game is the game at the start of the normal 7-match BB (normal middle red 7BB or normal middle blue 7BB) (S472). In this process, when the BB start flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a game at the start of BB, which is normally 7 games.

In S472, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not the game at the start of the 7-aligned BB (when the determination in S472 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S474 described later. On the other hand, in S472, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the game at the start of the 7-match BB during normal operation (when the determination in S472 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART entry mode selection process (S473). .. In this process, the player processes the selection effect of the ART entry mode. The details of the ART entry mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later.

After the processing of S473, or when the determination in S472 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of successful JRs in the game period of the 7-matched BB state during this normal period is 3 or more (S474).

In S474, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JR successes is 3 or more (when the determination in S474 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. 111). (See) to S464. That is, in the present embodiment, the JR lottery process described later is not performed in the situation where the number of successful JRs is 3 or more in the game period in the 7-match BB state during normal times.

On the other hand, in S474, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of successful JR times is not 3 times or more (less than 3 times) (when the determination in S474 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the JR lottery process (S475). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the JR lottery table (see FIG. 76) in the 7-set BB (normal), and determines the winning / non-winning of the JR effect.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the JR effect has been won (S476). In S476, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR effect has not been won (when the determination in S476 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111). Move to S464.

On the other hand, in S476, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR effect has been won (when the determination in S476 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the ON state (S477). By this process, a JR effect is generated. Then, after the processing of S477, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

Here, returning to the process of S471 again, when the determination in S471 is NO (when the sub-game state is the 7-matched BB state or the premium BB state during ART), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART addition game number lottery process (when the sub-game state is the BB state or the premium BB state during ART). S478). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional lottery table for the number of ART games corresponding to the sub-game state (see FIG. 81 or FIG. 82), and determines the number of ART additional games.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of ART additional games (lottery result) determined in S478 to the current number of remaining ART games (S479).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the JR lottery process (S480). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the JR lottery table (see FIG. 77 or 78) corresponding to the sub-game state, and the winning / non-winning of the JR effect and the number of games added to the ART when the JR is successful (5, 10 or 30G) is determined. In this JR lottery process, the winning probability of the JR effect differs depending on the number of successful JRs in the game period in the BB state this time.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the JR effect has been won (S481). In S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR effect has not been won (when the determination in S481 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111). Move to S464.

On the other hand, in S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR effect has been won (when the determination in S481 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the ON state (S482). By this process, a JR effect is generated.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART additional games (JR lottery result) at the time of success of JR determined by the JR lottery process is larger than 10 games (prescribed number of additional unit games) (S483). In S483, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR lottery result is not larger than 10 games (when the determination in S483 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. 111). (See) to S464.

On the other hand, in S483, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR lottery result is larger than 10 games (when the determination in S483 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has the JR lottery result (the number of ART additional games at the time of JR success is 30 games). An effect that suggests (something) on the liquid crystal screen 11a is set (S484). Then, after the processing of S484, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during BB, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

In the present embodiment, the JR lottery processing of S475 and S480 during the processing during the BB is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining whether or not to execute the JR effect (privilege-giving effect determining means). Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of S483 and S484 during the processing during the BB is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of ART additional games (JR lottery result) at the time of JR success is 10 games or less, the sub-control circuit 101 does not notify the information suggesting the number of ART additional games. When the number of ART additional games (JR lottery result) at the time of JR success is larger than 10 games, it also serves as a means for notifying information suggesting the number of ART additional games (addition number suggestion effect execution means).

[ART rush mode selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the ART entry mode selection process performed in S473 in the flowchart of the process during BB (see FIG. 112) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an effect image (ART rush mode selection screen) on the liquid crystal screen 11a so that the player can select the ART rush mode (S491). By this process, the ART entry mode selection effect is started, and the player can select and determine the desired ART entry mode (any of the entry modes A to D) on the ART entry mode selection screen.

The ART entry mode selection and determination operation by the player is executed as follows. First, when the ART rush mode selection effect is started, for example, each option image of the rush modes A to D is displayed in the ART rush mode selection screen. The player operates the selection button 25 provided on the front door 2b to select a desired rush mode option image from the rush mode A to D option images. Then, when the player presses the MAX bet button 21 with the option image of the desired rush mode selected, the selection of the desired rush mode is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the entry mode of the ART has been determined by the player (S492).

In S492, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the entry mode of the ART has not been determined by the player (when the determination in S492 is NO), the sub CPU 102 repeats the determination process in S492. That is, at the start of the normal 7-match BB (normal middle red 7BB or normal middle blue 7BB), the player is in a standby state until the ART entry mode is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the player does not perform the selection operation within a predetermined time after the start of the ART rush mode selection effect, the rush modes A to D are predetermined. The rush mode may be automatically determined. In this case, the predetermined rush mode that is automatically determined may be predetermined or may be randomly determined for each effect execution.

On the other hand, in S492, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the entry mode of the ART has been determined by the player (when the determination in S492 is YES), the sub CPU 102 registers the determined entry mode of the ART (S493). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the BB start flag to the off state (S494). Then, after the processing of S494, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART entry mode selection processing, and shifts the processing to S474 of the BB intermediate processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the ART processing performed in S456 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART start flag is in the ON state (S501). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is an ART set start game.

In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S501 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing (S502). In this process, the FC game control process at the start of the ART set, that is, the FC game process for determining the number of ART initial games is performed. The details of the processing during FC will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S502, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S501 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC generation flag is in the ON state (S503). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game during the FC game period.

In S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing (S504). In this process, the control process of the FC game during the ART set period described above is performed. The details of the processing during FC will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the current number of remaining ART games (S505).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC / ART game number lottery process (S506). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC / additional lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 65A and 65B), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of winning / non-winning of FC games and the number of additional games of ART games. Both lottery processes are performed at the same time.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of ART additional games (lottery result) determined by the lottery process of S506 to the current number of remaining ART games (S507). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC game has been won by the lottery process of S506 (S508).

In S508, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has won (when the determination in S508 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag and the FC generation flag to the ON state (S509). By this process, the FC game is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S509, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S508, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has not won (when the determination in S508 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining ART games is 0 (S510).

In S510, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not 0 (when the determination in S510 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111). Move to S464.

On the other hand, in S510, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games is 0 (when the determination in S510 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART set end processing (S511). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs a set process of the sub game state (sub control flag) that shifts after the ART of the current set ends. The details of the ART set end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S511, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

In the present embodiment, the processing of S506 during the processing during ART is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege (acquisition of winning of FC game and additional game number of ART game) during the game period of ART game (privilege determination). It also serves as a means). Further, the processing of S507 to S509 during the processing during ART is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 is determined to grant the privilege (the winning of the FC game and the acquisition of the number of additional games of the ART game) during the game period of the ART game, the privilege is given in the unit game. It also serves as a means for executing the granting process (privilege granting means).

[Processing during FC]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the FC processing performed in S502 or S504 in the flowchart of the ART processing flowchart (see FIG. 114) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART start flag is in the ON state (S521). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is an ART set start game.

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S523 described later. On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART set start processing (S522). In this process, a process such as an ART continuous lottery executed in the FC game at the start of the ART set is performed. The details of the ART set start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.

After the processing of S522 or when the determination in S521 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC start flag is in the ON state (S523). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the start game of the FC game period.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S523 that the FC start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S523 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S528 described later. On the other hand, in S523, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S523 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "5" to the number of remaining FC games (S524).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC mode lottery process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC mode lottery table (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) and determines the FC mode based on the internal winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined FC mode (S526). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag to the off state (S527).

After the processing of S527 or when the determination in S523 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC game number addition lottery processing (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 71 and 72) corresponding to the set FC mode, and determines the number of FC addition games based on the internal winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of FC addition games (lottery result) to the current number of remaining FC games (S529).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART game number addition lottery process (S530). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC middle addition lottery table (see FIGS. 73 to 75) corresponding to the set FC mode, and determines the number of ART addition games based on the internal winning combination. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of ART additional games (lottery result) to the current number of remaining ART games (S531).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect set processing during FC (S532). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a special effect performed during the FC game, such as the above-mentioned continuous hitting effect and the outcome fusion. The details of the effect set processing during FC will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining FC games (S533). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining FC games is 0 (S534).

In S534, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC games is not 0 (when the determination in S534 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the FC processing and also the ART processing (see FIG. 114). .. On the other hand, in S534, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC games is 0 (when the determination in S534 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC generation flag to the off state (S535). By this process, the FC game ends in the current game. Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during FC and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 114).

In the present embodiment, the above-described FC processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game execution means) for executing the FC game (additional game). Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of S525 during the processing during FC is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (addition mode determining means) for determining a predetermined FC mode from a plurality of types of FC modes (addition mode). Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of S528 during the processing during FC is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game addition means) for determining the number of FC addition games based on the internal winning combination. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of S530 during the processing during FC is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notification extension determination means) for determining the number of ART additional games (extended game period). Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of S531 during the processing during FC is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notified game number adding means) for cumulatively adding the number of ART addition games determined for each unit game over the FC game period.

[Processing at ART set start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the ART set start processing performed in S522 in the flowchart of the FC processing during FC (see FIG. 115) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs ART continuous lottery processing (S541). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART continuation lottery table (see FIG. 66) and determines the continuation / discontinuation of ART based on the currently set loop mode.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART continuation has been won by the lottery process of S541 (S542). In S542, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation has not been won (when the determination in S542 is NO), the sub CPU 102 resets the number of ART consecutive villas (S543). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of ART consecutive villas. Then, after the processing of S543, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S552 described later.

On the other hand, in S542, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation has been won (when the determination in S542 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART loop mode promotion lottery process (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the loop mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 67), and based on the loop mode set in the ART of the current set (this time), the loop mode in the ART of the next set (next time). To determine. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the loop mode of the determined next set of ART (S545).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the number of ART consecutive villas (S546). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART consecutive villas is "16" (S547).

In S547, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART consecutive villas is "16" (when the determination in S547 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S552 described later. On the other hand, in S547, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART consecutive villas is not "16" (when the determination in S547 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART latent lottery table (see FIG. 68) and the ART latent. The lottery process is performed (S548).

After the process of S548, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART latent lottery has been won (S549). In S549, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART latent lottery has not been won (when the determination in S549 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S552 described later.

On the other hand, in S549, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART latent lottery has been won (when the determination in S549 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the latent omen game number lottery table (see FIG. 69), and the latent omen The number of games is drawn (S550). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined number of latent omen games (S551).

After the processing of S543 or S551, if S547 determines YES or S549 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART start flag to the off state (S552). Then, after the processing of S552, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the ART set, and shifts the processing to S523 of the processing during FC (see FIG. 115).

In the present embodiment, the processing of S541 during the processing at the start of the ART set is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining whether or not to continue ART (a means for determining whether or not to continue ART). Further, the processing of S546 during the processing at the start of the ART set is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for counting the number of ART consecutive villas (means for counting the number of continuous continuations). Further, the processing of S548 during the processing at the start of the ART set is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also has a means (non-notification game determination means) for determining whether or not to perform an ART latent game (non-notification game) for a predetermined unit number of games while the ART is continued. Also serves as. Further, the processing of S550 during the processing at the start of the ART set is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (non-notification game period determination means) for determining the game (non-notification game) period in the ART latent state.

[FC production set processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the FC intermediate effect set processing performed in S532 in the flowchart of the FC intermediate processing (see FIG. 115) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not FC mode 5 is set (S561).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the FC mode 5 is set (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 draws an additional lottery for the number of ART games (see FIG. 115) in the FC processing (see FIG. 115). ) Is determined (S562).

In S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional lottery for the number of ART games has not been won (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the FC in-promotion set process and processes the process in FC (FC in-progress process). Move to S533 (see FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional lottery for the number of ART games has been won (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the continuous hitting effect pattern (see FIGS. 61A and 61B) (see FIGS. 61A and 61B). S563). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the continuous hitting effect flag to the ON state, and sets the number of repeated hits to "0" (S564). The "continuous hitting effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the continuous hitting effect, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. Further, the "number of repeated hits" is a parameter for counting the number of times the player presses the selection button 25 in the continuous hit effect, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. The number of repeated hits is counted by the non-operation command reception process described later (see FIG. 133 described later). Then, after the processing of S564, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect set processing during FC, and shifts the processing to S533 of the processing during FC (see FIG. 115).

Here, returning to the process of S561 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S561 that the FC mode 5 is not set (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination related to the watermelon. Whether or not the number of ART additional games determined by the additional lottery (S530) of the number of ART games that is the internal winning combination (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) and is being processed during FC (see FIG. 115) is 100 or more. Determine (S565).

In S565, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S565 is not satisfied (when the determination in S565 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the FC during effect set process and performs the process during FC (see FIG. 115). Move to S533. On the other hand, in S565, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S565 is satisfied (when the determination in S565 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a special effect during FC (outgoing fusion) using the liquid crystal sub reel described above. (S566). Then, after the processing of S566, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect set processing during FC, and shifts the processing to S533 of the processing during FC (see FIG. 115).

In this embodiment, the process of S563 during the effect set process during FC is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins the ART addition lottery in the state where the FC mode 5 is set (when a specific condition is satisfied), the continuous hitting effect linked to the continuous hitting operation of the player. Also serves as a means for executing (specific effect execution means).

[Processing at the end of ART set]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the ART set end processing performed in S511 in the flowchart of the ART processing during ART (see FIG. 114) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART continuation is confirmed (S571).

In S571, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation is not confirmed (when the determination in S571 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag to the off state and sets the normal flag to the on state (S572). ). By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S572, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the ART set, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S571, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation is confirmed (when the determination in S571 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the latent lottery has been won (S573).

In S573, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the latent lottery has been won (when the determination in S573 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag to the off state and turns the ART latent flag and the normal flag into the on state. Set (S574). By this process, the game in the ART latent state is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S574, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the ART set, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S573, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the latent lottery has not been won (when the determination in S573 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART consecutive villas is "16" (when it is determined that the number of ART consecutive villas is "16"). S575).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART consecutive villas is not "16" (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART start flag, the FC start flag, and the FC generation flag to the ON state. (S576). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 keeps the ART flag on. By the process of S576, the game in the ART state is continuously performed after the next game. Then, after the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the ART set, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 114).

On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART consecutive villas is "16" (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ending ART flag to the ON state (S575). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 keeps the ART flag on. By the process of S577, the ending ART game is started from the next game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "50" to the number of remaining ART games in the ending (S578). The "number of remaining ART games at the ending" is a parameter indicating the number of remaining unit games of the ending ART. Then, after the processing of S578, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the ART set, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 114).

[Processing during ending ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the processing during the ending ART performed in S457 in the flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining ART games at the ending (S581). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC / ART game number lottery process (S582). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC / additional lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 65A and 65B), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of winning / non-winning of FC games and the number of additional games of ART games. Both lottery processes are performed at the same time.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the privilege (the number of FC games and / or ART additional games) has been won (S583). In S583, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the privilege has not been won (when the determination in S583 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S588 described later.

On the other hand, in S583, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the privilege has been won (when the determination in S583 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the stock flag to the ON state (S584). The "stock flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a privilege (FC game and / or number of ART additional games) has been acquired by the FC / ART game number lottery process during the ending ART game period, and is displayed in the sub RAM 103. It is stored. In addition, when the award is won twice or more during the game period of the ending ART, the process of maintaining the on state of the stock flag is performed in the processing of S584 at the time of winning the award for the second and subsequent times.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottery result (the number of ART additional games) of the FC / ART game number lottery process of S582 to the current number of stock ART games (S585). The "stock ART game number" is a parameter indicating the total number of ART additional games acquired (stocked) by the FC / ART game number lottery process during the ending ART game period.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC game has been won by the FC / ART game number lottery process of S582 (S586).

In S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has not won (when the determination in S586 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S588 described later. On the other hand, in S586, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has been won (when the determination in S586 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the current number of stock FCs (S587). The "stock FC number" is a parameter indicating the total number of sets of FC games acquired (stocked) by the FC / ART game number lottery process during the ending ART game period.

After the processing of S587, or when S583 or S586 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining ART games ending is "0" (S588).

In S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games in the ending is not "0" (when the determination in S588 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the ending ART and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (processing at the time of receiving the start command). Move to S464 (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S588, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games for the ending is "0" (when the determination in S588 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ending ART flag to the off state, and the 16th station. The ART flag, ART start flag, FC start flag, and FC generation flag are set to the ON state (S589). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 keeps the ART flag on. By the process of S589, the 16th consecutive ART game is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S589, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the ending ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

[Processing during 16th ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the 16th consecutive ART processing performed in S458 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stock release flag is in the ON state (S591). The "stock release flag" is a game in which the current game executes (releases) the game of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) acquired in the ending ART during the 16th consecutive ART game period. It is a flag indicating whether or not, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. Further, the stock release flag is set to the ON state in the additional stock release start processing (see FIG. 124 described later) described later.

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stock release flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional stock release preprocessing (S592). In this process, the ART game is processed from the game at the start of the 16th ART game to the game before the release start game of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) stocked in the ending ART. .. That is, the same processing as in the ART game other than the 16th station is performed. The details of the additional stock release pretreatment will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later. Then, after the processing of S592, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S594 described later.

On the other hand, in S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stock release flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional stock release processing (S593). In this process, during the 16th consecutive ART game period, the release game of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) stocked in the ending ART is processed. The details of the process during the release of the additional stock will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later. Then, after the processing of S593, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S594 described later.

After the processing of S592 or S593, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining ART games is "0" (S594). In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not "0" (when the determination in S594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the 16th ART, and processes the process when the start command is received. Move to S464 (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining ART games is "0" (when the determination in S594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing at the end of the 16th ART set (S595). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the release game of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) stocked in the ending ART, or the sub game state (sub) that shifts after the end of the 16th ART. Control flag) is set. The details of the processing at the end of the 16th ART set will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later. Then, after the processing of S595, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the 16th consecutive ART, and shifts the processing to S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111).

[Additional stock release pretreatment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the additional stock release pre-processing performed in S592 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the processing during the 16th ART is described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART start flag is in the ON state (S601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the 16th ART set start game.

In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing described in FIG. 115 (S602). In this process, the control process of the FC game at the start of setting the ART, that is, the process of the FC game for determining the number of the 16th ART initial game is performed. Then, after the processing of S602, the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release preprocessing, and shifts the processing to S594 of the 16th consecutive ART in-process (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART start flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC generation flag is in the ON state (S603). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game during the FC game period.

In S603, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S603 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing described in FIG. 115 (S604). In this process, the control process of the FC game during the set period of ART is performed. Then, after the processing of S604, the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release preprocessing, and shifts the processing to S594 of the 16th consecutive ART in-process (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S603 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the current number of remaining ART games (S605).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC / ART game number lottery process (S606). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC / additional lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 65A and 65B), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of winning / non-winning of FC games and the number of additional games of ART games. Both lottery processes are performed at the same time.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of ART additional games (lottery result) determined by the lottery process of S606 to the current number of remaining ART games (S607). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC game has been won by the lottery process of S606 (S608).

In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game did not win (when the determination in S608 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release pre-processing, and performs the processing during the 16th consecutive ART (FIG. 120). (See) to S594. On the other hand, in S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has won (when the determination in S608 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag and the FC generation flag to the ON state (S609). By this process, the FC game during the ART set period is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S609, the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release preprocessing, and shifts the processing to S594 of the 16th consecutive ART in-process (see FIG. 120).

[Processing during additional stock release]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process during additional stock release performed in S593 in the flowchart of the process during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining FC stocks is "0" (S611). The "remaining FC stock number" is a parameter for counting the number of sets of remaining FC games that can be released (executed) in the privilege release game executed in the 16th consecutive ART game period. The initial value (stock FC number) of the remaining FC stock number is set by the additional stock release start processing described later (see FIG. 124 described later).

In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is "0" (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S617 described later.

On the other hand, in S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is not "0" (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing described in FIG. 115 (S612). In this process, the control process of the FC game during the set period of ART is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC generation flag is in the off state (S613). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the end game of one set of FC games being released.

In S613, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S613 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release processing, and performs the processing during the 16th ART (FIG. See 120) and move to S594. On the other hand, in S613, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is in the off state (when the determination in S613 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the remaining FC stock number (S614).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining FC stocks is “0” (S615). In S615, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is "0" (when the determination in S615 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process of releasing the additional stock and is performing the process in the 16th consecutive ART. The process moves to S594 (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S615, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is not "0" (when the determination in S615 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag and the FC generation flag to the ON state (S616). ). By this process, the release process for one set of the currently remaining FC games (stocked FC games) is restarted from the next game. Then, after the processing of S616, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the additional stock release, and shifts the processing to S594 of the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

Here, returning to the process of S611 again, when the determination in S611 is YES, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC generation flag is in the ON state (S617).

In S617, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S617 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the FC processing described in FIG. 115 (S618). In this process, the control process of the FC game during the set period of ART is performed. Then, after the processing of S618, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the additional stock release, and shifts the processing to S594 of the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S617, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC generation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S617 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the current number of remaining ART games (S619).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the FC / ART game number lottery process (S620). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the FC / additional lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 65A and 65B), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of winning / non-winning of FC games and the number of additional games of ART games. Both lottery processes are performed at the same time.

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of ART additional games (lottery result) determined by the lottery process of S620 to the current number of remaining ART games (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the FC game has been won by the lottery process of S620 (S622).

In S622, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has not won (when the determination in S622 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the additional stock release processing, and performs the processing during the 16th consecutive ART (FIG. 120). (See) to S594. On the other hand, in S622, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the FC game has been won (when the determination in S622 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag and the FC generation flag to the ON state (S623). By this process, the FC game during the ART set period is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S623, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the additional stock release, and shifts the processing to S594 of the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

[Processing at the end of the 16th ART set]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the processing at the end of the 16th ART set performed in S595 in the flowchart of the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stock flag is in the ON state (S631). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to start the release game of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) stocked in the ending ART from the next game in the 16th consecutive ART game. ..

In S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stock flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S631 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional stock release start processing (S632). In this process, in the 16th consecutive ART game, the transfer process of the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) stocked in the ending ART to the release game is performed. The details of the processing at the start of release of the additional stock will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later. Then, after the processing of S632, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the 16th ART set, and also ends the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stock flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S631 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART continuation is confirmed (S633).

In S633, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation is not confirmed (when the determination in S633 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag, the 16th station ART flag, and the stock release flag to the off state. The normal flag is set to the on state (S634). By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game. If the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) is not stocked in the ending ART, the stock release flag is off at the time of this processing, so that the sub CPU 102 sets the stock release flag. Performs processing to keep it off.

Then, after the processing of S634, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the 16th ART set, and also ends the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S633, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART continuation is confirmed (when the determination in S633 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the latent lottery has been won (S635).

In S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the latent lottery has not been won (when the determination in S635 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the 16th station ART flag and the stock release flag to the off state, and sets the ART start flag. , FC start flag and FC generation flag are set to the ON state (S636). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 keeps the ART flag on. By the process of S636, the game in the ART state (17th ART game) is continuously performed after the next game. If the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) is not stocked in the ending ART, the stock release flag is off at the time of this processing, so that the sub CPU 102 sets the stock release flag. Performs processing to keep it off. Then, after the processing of S636, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the 16th ART set, and also ends the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the latent lottery has been won (when the determination in S635 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag, the 16th consecutive ART flag, and the stock release flag to the off state. Then, the ART latent flag and the normal flag are set to the ON state (S637). By this process, the game in the ART latent state is started from the next game. If the privilege (FC game and / or the number of ART additional games) is not stocked in the ending ART, the stock release flag is off at the time of this processing, so that the sub CPU 102 sets the stock release flag. Performs processing to keep it off.

Then, after the processing of S637, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the 16th ART set, and also ends the processing during the 16th ART (see FIG. 120).

[Processing at the start of additional stock release]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the additional stock release start processing performed in S632 in the flowchart (see FIG. 123) of the 16th ART set end processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the stock flag to the off state and sets the stock release flag to the on state (S641). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets (adds) the number of stock ART games (the total number of ART additional games stocked in the ending ART) to the number of remaining ART games (“0” at this point) (S642). In this process, after the number of stock ART games is set in the number of remaining ART games, the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the number of stock ART games (sets it to "0").

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of stock FCs (the total number of sets of FC games stocked in the ending ART) to the number of remaining FC stocks (S643). In this process, after the stock FC number is set in the remaining FC stock number, the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the stock FC number (sets to "0").

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining FC stocks is “0” (S644). In S644, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is "0" (when the determination in S644 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the additional stock release, and sets the 16th ART. The end-time processing (see FIG. 123) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S644, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining FC stocks is not "0" (when the determination in S644 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the FC start flag and the FC generation flag to the ON state (S645). ). By this process, one set of FC games stocked from the next game is released. Then, after the processing of S645, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of additional stock discharge, and also ends the processing at the end of the 16th ART set (see FIG. 123).

[Processing during ART preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the ART preparation processing performed in S460 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first ART preparation flag is in the ON state (S651). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game during the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state).

In S651, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first ART preparation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S651 is NO), that is, when the current game is a game during the ART operation preparation period, the sub CPU 102 will be described later. The process of S654 is performed.

On the other hand, in S651, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first ART preparation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S651 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT transition combination has been won (S652). .. In the game during the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state), when the main gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the transition role that triggers the transition from the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state is the "bell transition". (A transitional combination according to any of the combination names "R_HAZ_01" to "R_HAZ_16" (see FIG. 11)). In addition, in the game during the RT transition preparation period, when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the transition role that triggers the transition from the RT gaming state to the RT2 gaming state is the "RT2 transition lip" (combination name). It serves as a replay role (see FIG. 9) related to "C_REP_RT2". Therefore, when these transitional combinations are won, S652 is a YES determination.

In S652, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT transition combination has not won (when the determination in S652 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation processing and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111). ) To S464. On the other hand, in S652, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT transition combination has been won (when the determination in S652 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is for displaying the symbol combination related to the winning RT transition combination on the effective line. Set the push order navigation (S653). Then, after the processing of S653, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation processing, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

Here, returning to the process of S651 again, when S651 determines NO (that is, when the current game is a game during the ART operation preparation period), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal replay combination has been internally won. Determine (S654). In S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal replay combination did not win internally (when the determination in S654 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation process and starts the process when the start command is received (FIG. 111). (See) to S464.

On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal replay combination has been internally won (when the determination in S654 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the push order navigation corresponding to the type of the normal replay combination that has been internally won. (S655). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets the push order navigation corresponding to the type of the normal replay combination that has been internally won, based on the correspondence table between the type of the normal replay combination and the type of the push order navigation shown in FIG. Then, after the processing of S655, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation processing, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

[Processing during ART latency]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the ART latent processing performed in S462 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the current number of latent omen games (S661). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of latent omen games after subtraction is "0" (S662).

In S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of latent omen games is not "0" (when the determination in S662 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART latent processing and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. (Refer to 111), move to S464.

On the other hand, in S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of latent omen games is "0" (when the determination in S662 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART latent flag and the normal flag to the off state, and the second 2 Set the ART preparation flag to the ON state (S663). By this process, the game of the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state) is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S663, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART latent processing, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the normal processing performed in S463 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process (S671). In this process, the sub CPU 102 usually refers to the ART lottery table (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) and determines the winning / non-winning of the ART based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won by the lottery process of S671 (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has not won (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and starts the processing in S464 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 111). Move to.

On the other hand, in S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has won (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART loop mode lottery process (S673). In this process, the sub CPU 102 usually refers to the middle loop mode lottery table (see FIG. 64) to determine the loop mode of ART. The sub CPU 102 then sets the determined ART loop mode (S674).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the second ART preparation flag to the on state and sets the normal flag to the off state (S675). By this process, the game of the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state) is started from the next game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "1" to the number of ART consecutive villas (S676). Then, after the processing of S676, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S464 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 111).

In the present embodiment, the ART lottery process performed by S671 during the normal processing and S703 (see FIG. 129 described later) during the JR success processing described later is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game determining means) for executing the ART lottery process.

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S425 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the JR generation flag is in the ON state (S681).

In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR generation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S681 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. 110). (See) to S426. On the other hand, in S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the JR generation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S681 is YES), the sub CPU 102 asks whether the received reel stop command is the command at the time of the first stop operation. Whether or not it is determined (S682).

In S682, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received reel stop command is not the command at the time of the first stop operation (when the determination in S682 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S686 described later.

On the other hand, in S682, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received reel stop command is the command at the time of the first stop operation (when the determination in S682 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop operation determination process (when the determination is YES). S683). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first stop operation by the player is performed at a timing within a predetermined success range in the JR effect.

For example, in the example of the JR effect shown in FIG. 62, the timing of the first stop operation by the player is at a timing within one of the three success ranges 122, 123, and 124 defined by the JR effect. Determine if it was there. Then, when the timing of the first stop operation by the player is within the success range of any one of the three success ranges 122, 123, 124, the sub CPU 102 performs the first stop by the player. Judge that the operation was successful.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first stop operation by the player has succeeded in the JR effect based on the determination result of S683 (S684).

In S684, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first stop operation by the player has succeeded (when the determination in S684 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content. Move to S426 (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in S684, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first stop operation by the player has not succeeded (when the determination in S684 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the off state (S685). That is, in the JR effect, if the player's first stop operation fails, the JR effect ends at the time of the first stop operation. Then, after the processing of S685, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S426 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

Here, returning to the process of S682 again, when the determination in S682 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received reel stop command is the command at the time of the second stop operation (S686).

In S686, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received reel stop command is not the command at the time of the second stop operation (when the determination in S686 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S690 described later.

On the other hand, in S686, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received reel stop command is the command at the time of the second stop operation (when the determination in S686 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the second stop operation determination process (when the determination is YES). S687). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the second stop operation by the player is performed at a timing within a predetermined success range in the JR effect.

For example, in the example of the JR effect shown in FIG. 62, the timing of the second stop operation by the player is the first stop operation determination process of S683 out of the three success ranges 122, 123, 124 defined by the JR effect. It is determined whether or not the timing is within one of the remaining two success ranges excluding the success range that is the judgment target in. Then, when the timing of the second stop operation by the player is within one of the remaining two success ranges, the sub CPU 102 determines that the second stop operation by the player has succeeded.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the second stop operation by the player has succeeded in the JR effect based on the determination result of S687 (S688).

In S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the second stop operation by the player has succeeded (when the determination in S688 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content. Move to S426 (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the second stop operation by the player has not succeeded (when the determination in S688 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the off state (S689). That is, in the JR effect, if the player's second stop operation fails, the JR effect ends at the time of the second stop operation. Then, after the processing of S689, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S426 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

Here, returning to the process of S686 again, when S686 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the third stop operation determination process (S690). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the third stop operation by the player is performed at a timing within a predetermined success range in the JR effect.

For example, in the example of the JR effect shown in FIG. 62, the timing of the third stop operation by the player is the first stop operation determination process of S683 out of the three success ranges 122, 123, 124 defined by the JR effect. And, it is determined whether or not the timing is within the remaining one success range excluding the success range that is the determination target in the second stop operation determination process of S687. Then, when the timing of the third stop operation by the player is within the remaining one success range, the sub CPU 102 determines that the third stop operation by the player has succeeded.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the third stop operation by the player has succeeded in the JR effect based on the determination result of S690 (S691).

In S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the third stop operation by the player has not succeeded (when the determination in S691 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the off state (S692). This process ends the JR production. Then, after the processing of S692, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S426 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the third stop operation by the player has succeeded (when the determination in S691 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the JR success processing (S693). In this process, in the JR effect, a privilege (number of games added to ART or ART lottery) that is executed when all the stop operations by the player are successful is performed. The details of the JR success processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the JR generation flag to the off state (S694). This process ends the JR production. Then, after the processing of S694, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S426 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

[Processing when JR succeeds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the JR success processing performed in S693 in the flowchart (see FIG. 128) of the reel stop command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the number of successful JR trains (S701). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is the BB state with 7 sets in the normal state (S702). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is the 7-matched BB state in the normal state based on the on / off states of the red 7BB flag, the blue 7BB flag, the premium BB flag, and the normal flag.

In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is not the BB state in which 7 are normally aligned (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S709 described later.

On the other hand, in S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is the BB state with 7 sets in the normal state (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery process at the time of JR success (S703). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table (see FIG. 79) in the 7-matched BB (normal), and based on the type of the 7-matched BB being executed and the entry mode of the ART, the winning / non-winning of the ART To determine.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has been won by the lottery process of S703 (S704). In S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has not won (when the determination in S704 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the JR success processing and performs the processing when the reel stop command is received (see FIG. 128). Move to S694.

On the other hand, in S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has won (when the determination in S704 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART loop mode lottery process (S705). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the 7-match BB (normal) middle loop mode lottery table (see FIG. 80), and sets the ART loop mode based on the type of the 7-match BB being executed and the ART entry mode. decide. The sub CPU 102 then sets the determined ART loop mode (S706).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "1" to the number of ART consecutive villas (S707). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to the ON state (S708). Then, after the processing of S708, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of success of JR, and shifts the processing to S694 of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 128).

Here, returning to the process of S702 again, when the determination in S702 is NO, that is, when the sub-game state is the 7-match BB state or the premium BB state during ART, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB process (see FIG. 112). ), The number of ART additional games (lottery result) determined by the JR lottery process (additional lottery process) of S480 is added to the current number of remaining ART games (S709). Then, after the processing of S709, the sub CPU 102 ends the JR success processing, and shifts the processing to S694 of the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 128).

In this embodiment, the processing of S701 during the JR success processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for counting the number of successes of JR (means for counting the number of successes).

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the display command reception processing performed in S428 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first ART preparation flag is in the ON state (S711). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state).

In S711, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first ART preparation flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S711 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. 110). (See) to S429. On the other hand, in S711, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first ART preparation flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S711 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "RT transition lip" has won a prize (when the determination is YES). S712). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination that triggers the transition to the RT2 gaming state has won a prize.

In S712, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "RT transition lip" has not won a prize (when the determination in S712 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. (Refer to 110), move to S429.

On the other hand, in S712, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "RT transition lip" has won a prize (when the determination in S712 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART flag is on (S713). .. That is, in this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "RT transition lip" has won a prize and returned to the ART state in the game in the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state) after the end of the BB game during ART. When returning to the ART state via a game in the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state) after the end of the BB game during ART, the ART flag is in the ON state at the time of S713. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the ART state via the game in the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state) after the end of the normal BB game, the ART flag is in the off state at the time of S713.

In S713, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S713 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first ART preparation flag to the OFF state (S714). By this process, the remaining ART games of the current set are started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S714, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S429 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, in S713, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S713 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the first ART preparation flag to the off state and turns on the second ART preparation flag. Set to the state (S715). By this process, the game of the ART operation preparation period (ART preparation state) is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S715, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S429 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

[Processing when receiving bonus end command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command performed in S436 in the flowchart (see FIG. 110) of the effect content determination process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data for ending the bonus (S721). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets various related flags for BB control to the off state (S722).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is in the ON state (S723). It should be noted that the ART winning flag is turned on when the JR effect executed in the BB state of 7 sets in the normal state is successful and the ART lottery processing at the time of the success of JR is won (see FIG. 129). Further, the ART winning flag is stored in the sub RAM 103.

In S723, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S723 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S726 described later.

On the other hand, in S723, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S723 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first ART preparation flag to the ON state and turns the normal flag off. (S724). By this process, the game of the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state) after the end of the BB game is started from the next game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART winning flag to the off state (S725). Then, after the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

Here, returning to the process of S723 again, when S723 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART flag is on (S726). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the game at the end of the BB game during ART. If the current game is a game at the end of the BB game during ART, the ART flag is set to the ON state at the time of processing S726.

In S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command and determines the effect content (see FIG. 110). Also ends.

On the other hand, in S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first ART preparation flag to the ON state (S727). By this process, the game of the RT transition preparation period (ART preparation state) after the end of the BB game during ART is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S727, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

[Processing when receiving lock command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the lock command reception processing performed in S438 in the flowchart (see FIG. 110) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART start notification effect (S731). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag, the ART start flag, the FC start flag, and the FC generation flag to the on state, and sets the second ART preparation flag to the off state (S732). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S732, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock command reception processing and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

In the present embodiment, the lock command reception process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. Further, the current game described in S426 during the above-mentioned effect content determination process is a game during the ART operation preparation period, and the ART game start signal is output to the external centralized terminal board 47 as a unit game (normal replay role). A unit game that follows the push order navigation twice and wins the next normal replay role after answering the push order navigation twice correctly) Stops the combination of specific liquid crystal symbols related to the ART prize by the liquid crystal sub reel. The effect processing to be performed is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a game during the ART operation preparation period, follows the push order navigation of the normal replay combination twice, and becomes the next normal replay combination after correctly answering the push order navigation twice. In the winning unit game, it also serves as a means (effect execution means) for notifying information indicating the start of the ART game.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S440 in the flowchart (see FIG. 110) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hitting effect flag is in the ON state (S741). When the continuous striking effect (see FIGS. 57 to 60) is currently in progress, the continuous striking effect flag is set to the on state at the time of this processing. In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (see FIG. 110). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous striking effect flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the end of the continuous striking effect (S742). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the data set of the continuous hitting effect pattern (see FIGS. 61A and 61B), and the number of additional display numbers corresponding to the next number of repeated hits (a value obtained by adding "1" to the current number of repeated hits). It is determined whether or not the data is "-1", and whether or not the continuous hitting effect is at the end is determined. At this time, when the data of the number of addition displays corresponding to the next number of repeated hits is "-1", the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect is finished.

In S742, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the end of the continuous striking effect (when the determination in S742 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S747 described later. On the other hand, in S742, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the end of the continuous striking effect (when the determination in S742 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the continuous striking screen display effect (S743). By this process, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays, for example, a continuous striking screen for prompting the player to perform a continuous striking operation as shown in FIGS. 57B, 58A and 58B, and FIG. 59A.

If the liquid crystal display device 11 has already displayed the continuous striking screen at the time of this process, the effect data for continuing the display effect of the continuous striking screen is set in this process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the selection switch 76 is in the ON state (S744). In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the selection switch 76 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (see FIG. 110). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the selection switch 76 is in the ON state (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the number of repeated hits (S745). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an additional effect pattern corresponding to the number of repeated hits after the addition process (S746). Then, after the processing of S746, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

Here, returning to the process of S742 again, if S742 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 102 sets the MAX bet pressing display effect (S747). By this process, an effect screen (MAX pressing instruction image 135) for urging the player to press the MAX bet button 21 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B.

When the MAX pressing instruction image 135 is already displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the time of this processing (the operation of pressing the MAX bet button 21 by the player since the previous reception of the no-operation command). If is not performed), in this process, effect data for continuing the display effect of the MAX pressing instruction image 135 is set.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 77 is in the ON state (S748). In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 77 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (see FIG. 110). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 77 is in the ON state (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the additional total number of games display effect (S749). By this process, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of ART additional games acquired by the continuous hitting effect is displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the continuous hitting effect flag to the off state (S750). Then, after the processing of S750, the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception processing, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 110).

<Various deformation examples>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included as long as the gist of the present invention described in the claims is not deviated. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the FC game at the start of the ART set, if the total number of ART additional games finally acquired is less than the predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games), the predetermined number of games is set to the ART initial stage. Although an example of the function of guaranteeing the number of ART initial games, which is the number of games, has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the FC game at the start of the ART set, if the total number of ART additional games acquired by the 4th game is less than a specific number of games (for example, 25 games), the 5th game ART game In the number addition lottery (S530 in FIG. 115), the number of ART addition games may be determined so that the total number of ART addition games at the end of the fifth game is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games). .. In this case, in the fifth game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, in order to ensure that the number of ART initial games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the FC additional lottery referred to in the first to fourth games is drawn. Instead of referring to the table (see FIG. 73), the FC middle addition lottery table in which the number of ART addition games equal to or greater than the difference between the total number of ART addition games acquired by the fourth game and the predetermined number of games is determined is referred to.

FIG. 134A and FIG. 134B show an example of an additional lottery table in FC that can be referred to in the fifth game of the FC game at the start of setting the ART in this example. In this example, an example will be described in which the threshold value (specific number of games) of the total number of ART additional games acquired by the fourth game is 25 games, and the guaranteed number of ART initial games is 30 games. .. That is, in the FC middle addition lottery table shown in FIGS. 134A and 134B, FC mode 1 is set, and the total number of ART addition games that can be acquired by the fourth game in the FC game at the start of the ART set. Is an additional lottery table in FC that is referred to when is less than 25 games.

For each of the FC modes 2 to 4, an additional lottery table for adding FC, which is referred to in the fifth game of the FC game at the start of the ART set, is separately provided, but the description is simplified here. Therefore, the illustration of the additional lottery table in the FC is omitted.

In the above embodiment, when the FC mode is FC mode 1 in the FC game, the number of ART additional games of 5 games or more is given for each game, so that the number of ART additional games of 5 games for each game is given by the 4th game. If is given, the total number of ART additional games (20 games) at the end of the FC game of the fourth game is less than 25 games. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 134A and 134B, the number of additional ART games of 10 or more games is always added to the FC middle addition lottery table referred to in the fifth game of the FC game at the start of the ART set. It is configured to be granted.

Therefore, in the FC game at the start of the ART set in this example, even if the total number of ART added games at the end of the FC game in the fourth game is less than 25 games, 10 games or more in the FC game in the fifth game. The number of additional games for ART is added. As a result, in this example, the number of ART initial games of 30 games or more is guaranteed.

In this example, in the first to fourth games of the FC game at the start of the ART set, the FC middle addition lottery table (see FIG. 73) described in the above embodiment is referred to. Further, if the number of games of the FC game is added, the FC middle addition lottery table described in the above embodiment is also referred to in the FC games of the sixth and subsequent games. Further, when the total number of ART additional games acquired by the fourth game in the FC game at the start of the ART set is 25 games or more, in the FC game of the fifth game, the FC described in the above embodiment Refer to the middle-added lottery table.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the winning trigger of ART in the case where the sub-game state is the normal state is only the ART lottery when the middle cheer or the chance lip B wins internally (FIGS. 63A and 63B). The present invention is not limited to this (see ART lottery table in normal times). As the winning trigger of ART in the normal state, not only the ART lottery at the time of winning the middle check or the winning of Chance Lip B, but also, for example, the time when the following conditions are satisfied may be provided.

For example, during the normal state, a predetermined game period (for example, a game period called a chance zone) in which the probability of winning ART in the ART lottery is high is provided, and in the predetermined game period, a predetermined small winning combination is internally won. When you do, you may win the ART. Further, for example, an internal winning combination (so-called ART fixing combination) that ART always wins in the ART lottery may be provided, and when the ART fixing combination wins, the ART winning combination may be used. However, in this case, the probability that the ART determinant wins internally is set to a very small value.

Further, for example, in a normal state, when a normal replay combination wins a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in succession, it may be an ART win. Further, for example, when two types of normal replay combinations having different internal winning probabilities are provided and the normal replaying combination having the higher internal winning probability wins a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in succession, or , When a normal replay combination having a lower internal winning probability wins a specific number of games (for example, 5 games) consecutively smaller than a predetermined number of games, the ART winning may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, an example in which a game lock at the time of lever-on (the second game lock) is generated when the cycle chance is won in the RT0 to RT2 states has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. In addition to the cycle chance, for example, a game lock may be generated when a normal replay combination wins a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in succession.

Further, two types of normal replay combinations having different internal winning probabilities are provided, and when the normal replay combination having the higher internal winning probability wins a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in succession, or inside. A game lock may be generated when a normal replay combination having a lower winning probability continuously wins a specific number of games (for example, 5 games) smaller than a predetermined number of games.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, for example, when an internal winning combination with a very low internal winning probability (for example, abbreviation "F_BB_01" or "F_chuche") wins during the game period in the ART state, the predetermined ART continues. A function of stocking one set of the game period in the ART state in which the rate (loop rate) is set may be provided.

In this configuration, for example, when ART ends during the game period in the ART state of the current set (when ART does not continue to the next set), the set of stocked ART is released after the game in the ART state of the current set ends. It will be newly started. In addition, if it is determined to continue ART after the next set in the game period of the current set in the ART state, the set of stocked ART will be released after the end of this series of continuous ART state game periods. It will be newly started.

The ART continuation rate of the set of stocked ART may be determined in advance to a predetermined value (for example, an upper limit value), may be determined by lottery or the like at the time of stocking, or may be an internal winning. It may be determined in association with the combination. Further, the ART continuation rate of the set of stocked ART may be higher than or the same as the ART continuation rate during the game period of the determined ART.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment and various modifications, an example is described in which a BB (RB) is provided as a bonus and the BB is a so-called first-class special accessory, which is a continuous accessory actuating device related to the RB. The invention is not limited to this.

The various techniques of the present invention can be applied to, for example, a pachislot machine having a configuration in which a game in which an AT or ART is operated is used as a pseudo bonus (hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo bonus") instead of the above-mentioned bonus. In this case, the game period (end condition) of the pseudo bonus may be managed by the number of games or the number of medals paid out.

When managing the game period (end condition) of the pseudo bonus by the number of games (when the game period of the pseudo bonus ends when the pseudo bonus is consumed by a predetermined number of unit games), the privilege at the time of JR success in the above-mentioned JR production May be added (added) to the number of unit games of the pseudo bonus regardless of the sub-game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, a configuration example of a game machine having an ART function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to, for example, a game machine having only an AT function.

Further, the parameters that define the pseudo bonus and the end condition (game period) of the ART game are not limited to the number of games, and any parameter can be used. For example, the pseudo bonus or the end condition of the ART game may be defined by parameters such as the number of navigations, the number of payouts, the difference number (net increase number), and the lottery result. In this case, the pseudo-bonus and the game period of the ART game are also extended by adding the pseudo-bonus and the ART game (pseudo-bonus and the extended game period of the ART game) according to the parameter that defines the end condition. As described above, for example, it can be specified by the number of navigations, the number of payouts, the difference number (net increase number), and the like.

Here, FIG. 135 shows an example of a game flow in a sub-game state when a pseudo BB in which an AT or ART is operated is provided in place of the above-mentioned BB game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment.

In this case, in the process of transition from the normal state to the pseudo BB state (first AT or ART state) and the process of transition from the AT (ART) state (second AT or ART state) to the pseudo BB state, " A "pseudo BB ready state" is provided. In this pseudo BB preparation state, for example, when the pseudo BB is ART, a transition game in the RT state is performed. Further, the period of the pseudo BB preparation state may be, for example, the period from the pseudo BB winning to the output of the pseudo BB start signal to the external centralized terminal board 47, as in the above embodiment.

[Modification 6]
In the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, a configuration example in which the continuous lottery of ART (pseudo-bonus) is performed only in the first game of the FC game at the start of the ART set (see S541 of the ART set start process in FIG. 116). As described above, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a continuous lottery of ART may be performed not only at the start of the set of ART but also in a unit game during the set of ART, and if the continuous lottery is won, one set of ART may be stocked. In this case, a continuous lottery may be performed for each unit game of ART, or a continuous lottery may be performed only in a unit game in which a specific condition is satisfied during the set of ART.

In addition, in the situation where the ART continuous lottery is won at the start of the ART set, if the ART continuous lottery is won during the ART set, the ART continuous lottery determined at the start of the set is invalidated. It may be. In addition, in a situation where not only the continuous lottery of ART but also the latent lottery of ART is won at the start of the set of ART, if the continuous lottery of ART is won during the set of the ART, the ART determined at the start of the set You may want to invalidate both the continuous win and the latent win.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the above example, and in a situation where the ART continuous lottery is won at the start of the ART set, even if the ART continuous lottery is won during the ART set, the ART at the start of the set The configuration may be such that the continuous winning is not invalidated. In this case, after the set of ART stocked in the set is digested, the set of ART that is continuously won is started at the start of the set. In addition, at this time, if the latent lottery of ART is also won, the set of ART stocked in the set is digested, the latent game is digested, and then the ART that is continuously won at the start of the set The set is started.

[Modification 7]
In the above-described embodiment and various modifications, the privilege (winning of FC games and / or acquisition of the number of additional games of ART games) acquired during the ending ART (setting processing of the remaining FC stock number and / or ART game) is given. Although a configuration example (see the processing at the start of additional stock release in FIGS. 49 and 124) in which the addition processing of the number is performed at the end of the next (16th station) ART set has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the process of granting the privilege acquired during the ending ART may be executed at the start of the next (16th station) ART set (however, after the number of ART initial games in the 16th station is determined).

In this case, although detailed description is omitted, for example, a flag for determining whether the current game is a game before the release of the additional stock during the 16th consecutive ART game period or a game during the release of the additional stock. , Counters and other discriminators are further provided. Then, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) determines the timing to start the release game of the privilege acquired during the ending ART based on the state of the discriminator (flag on / off state, counter value, etc.). Determine.

[Other various modifications]
Further, in the above-described embodiment and various modifications, for example, lottery processing (for example, internal lottery processing, etc.) and control processing related to the progress of the game are performed in the main control circuit, and lottery processing and control processing related to effect control are performed. Although the example performed by the sub-control circuit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the sub control circuit in the above embodiment and various modifications may be performed in the main control circuit. Further, for example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit in the above embodiment and various modifications may be performed in the sub control circuit.

<Summary>
[JR production function]
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine having an ART function in which both AT and RT operate at the same time (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42658). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42658 provides a high RT game section called a pseudo bonus in the process of transition from a game in a normal state to a game in an ART state, and the number of games in the ART state during the game period of the pseudo bonus ( A technique for performing an additional lottery (number of ART games) is described.

As described above, a special gaming state that makes it possible to grant a privilege related to a game in a specific gaming state that is advantageous to a player, such as an ART state (for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42658, the number of ART games is added). (For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42658, a pseudo-bonus game period) is known as a game machine provided separately from the specific game state. Further, in the present technical field, there is a demand for a gaming machine capable of further enhancing the interest of the player for the game in such a special gaming state.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above-mentioned first problem, and the first object of the present invention is to specify a special gaming state that can give a privilege related to a game in a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is to provide a technique capable of further enhancing a player's interest in a game in a special gaming state in a gaming machine provided separately from the gaming state.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means is executed, and
A special game determining means for determining the transition to the special gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the notified gaming state, and
In the unit game in the special gaming state, a privilege is given when the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means is within a predetermined time range corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the display column. A privilege granting effect determining means for deciding whether or not to execute the granting effect,
Success in counting the number of times that the privilege granting effect is executed and the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means is within the corresponding predetermined time range in one game period of the special game state. Equipped with a number counting means,
Probability that the privilege granting effect determination means determines the execution of the privilege granting effect when the number of times counted by the success number counting means is less than a predetermined number in one game period of the special gaming state. Is higher than the probability that the privilege granting effect determination means determines the execution of the privilege granting effect when the number of times counted by the success number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. ..

Further, in the first gaming machine of the present invention, one gaming period in the special gaming state ends when the number of payouts of the gaming medium exceeds a predetermined number.
The stop detected by the stop operation detecting means in the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game of the special game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state and the state shifts to the special game state. When the timing of the operation is within the corresponding predetermined time range, as the privilege, the notification game determination means performs a determination process of whether or not to shift the game state to the notification game state.
The stop detected by the stop operation detecting means in the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game of the special game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the notified game state and the state shifts to the special game state. When the timing of the operation is within the corresponding predetermined time range, the addition of the number of unit games in the notified game state may be determined as the privilege.

Further, in the first gaming machine of the present invention, one gaming period in the special gaming state ends when a predetermined number of unit games are consumed.
In the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game in the special gaming state, when the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means is within the corresponding predetermined time range, the special privilege is given. The addition of the number of unit games in the game state may be determined.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which a notification game in which notification by the notification means is executed can be executed, and
A special game determining means for determining the transition to the special gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state or the notified gaming state, and
In the unit game in the special gaming state, a privilege is given when the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means is within a predetermined time range corresponding to the variable display of the symbol in the display column. A privilege granting effect determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute the granting effect and determining a predetermined addition unit game number from among a plurality of types of addition unit games of the notified game as the privilege.
Success in counting the number of times that the privilege granting effect is executed and the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means is within the corresponding predetermined time range in one game period of the special game state. Counting means and
When the predetermined number of additional unit games determined by the privilege granting effect determining means is equal to or less than the specified number of additional unit games among the plurality of types of additional unit games, the predetermined number of additional unit games is used. When the specific information to be suggested is not notified by the notification means and the predetermined number of additional unit games is larger than the specified number of additional unit games, the specific information suggesting the predetermined number of additional unit games is provided. The addition number suggestion effect executing means to be notified by the notification means is provided.
Probability that the privilege granting effect determination means determines the execution of the privilege granting effect when the number of times counted by the success number counting means is less than a predetermined number in one game period of the special gaming state. Is higher than the probability that the privilege granting effect determination means determines the execution of the privilege granting effect when the number of times counted by the success number counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. ..

Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, one gaming period in the special gaming state ends when the number of payouts of the gaming medium exceeds a predetermined number.
The stop detected by the stop operation detecting means in the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game of the special game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state and the state shifts to the special game state. When the timing of the operation is within the corresponding predetermined time range, as the privilege, the notification game determination means performs a determination process of whether or not to shift the game state to the notification game state.
The stop detected by the stop operation detecting means in the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game of the special game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the notified game state and the state shifts to the special game state. When the timing of the operation is within the corresponding predetermined time range, as the privilege, the predetermined number of additional unit games of the notified game may be determined.

Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, one gaming period in the special gaming state ends when a predetermined number of unit games are consumed.
In the privilege granting effect executed in the unit game in the special gaming state, when the timing of the stop operation detected by the stop operation detecting means is within the corresponding predetermined time range, the special privilege is given. The addition of the number of unit games in the game state may be determined.

According to the first and second gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, a special gaming state (special gaming state) capable of giving a privilege related to a game in a specific gaming state (notifying gaming state) advantageous to the player is In a game machine provided separately from the specific game state, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game in the special game state.

[Various lottery functions in FC games]
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine having an ART function in which both AT and RT operate at the same time (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215284). Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-215284 proposes a technique for determining the number of unit games (number of games) to be digested during the operation period (game period) of the ART by lottery when the operation of the ART is started.

As described above, conventionally, in a game machine equipped with an ART function, a technique has been proposed in which an ART game period (number of ART games) is determined by lottery at the start of ART operation. However, in the present technical field, there is a demand for a technique capable of further improving a player's interest in determining an ART game period in a gaming machine having an ART function.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above-mentioned second problem, and a second object of the present invention is, for example, an interest of a player with respect to a mode of determining a period of a gaming state which is advantageous for a player such as ART and AT. It is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the number of players.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which a notification game in which notification is performed by the notification means can be executed, and
In the notified game state, for each unit game for at least a period of a predetermined number of unit games, the number of additional unit games of the notified game is calculated based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A determinable additional game can be executed, and at the start of the game period of the notified game state, the additional game executing means for executing the additional game is provided.
The additional game execution means is
It has a notification game number addition means for cumulatively adding the number of addition unit games of the notification game determined for each unit game over the game period of the additional game.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state, the number of added unit games of the notified game cumulatively added by the notified game number adding means over a period of at least the predetermined unit number of games. The total number is determined as the initial unit number of games of the notification game performed after the end of the additional game.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state, the notification cumulatively added by the notified game number adding means by the end of the unit game immediately before the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. When the total number of the additional unit games of the game is less than the specified number, in the unit game of the predetermined unit game number, the notified game number addition means is used by the end of the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. A gaming machine characterized in that the addition of the number of addition unit games of the notification game is determined so that the total number of the addition unit games of the notification game to be cumulatively added is equal to or more than a specified number.

Further, in the third game machine of the present invention, the additional game execution means is
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state, the notified game that determines whether or not to start the next game period of the notified game state after the end of the current game period of the notified game state. Continuation decision means and
For each unit game of the additional game, there is an additional game addition means capable of determining the number of additional unit games of the additional game based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. May be good.

Further, in order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which a notification game in which notification is performed by the notification means can be executed, and
In the notified game state, for each unit game for at least a period of a predetermined number of unit games, the number of additional unit games of the notified game is calculated based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A determinable additional game can be executed, the number of additional unit games of the additional game can be determined for each unit game in the additional game, and the additional game is performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state. Equipped with an additional game execution means to be executed,
The additional game executing means is a plurality of types of addition modes in which the number of unit games of the notified game and the number of unit games of the additional game are different from each other in the additional game performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state. It has an addition mode determining means for determining a predetermined addition mode from among
A predetermined internal winning combination is associated with each of the plurality of types of addition modes.
In the additional game, when the predetermined internal winning combination corresponding to the set addition mode is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the internal winning combination other than the predetermined internal winning combination is the internal. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of additional unit games of the notified game can be increased as compared with the case where the winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, and the addition of the additional game is fixed.

Further, in the fourth game machine of the present invention, the additional game execution means is
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state, the notified game that determines whether or not to start the next game period of the notified game state after the end of the current game period of the notified game state. Continuation decision means and
A notification game number addition means that cumulatively adds the number of addition unit games of the notification game determined for each unit game over the game period of the additional game.
For each unit game of the additional game, there is an additional game adding means capable of determining the number of additional unit games of the additional game based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state, the number of added unit games of the notified game cumulatively added by the notified game number adding means over a period of at least the predetermined unit number of games. The total number is determined as the initial unit number of games of the notification game performed after the end of the additional game.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state, the notification cumulatively added by the notified game number adding means by the end of the unit game immediately before the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. When the total number of the additional unit games of the game is less than the specified number, in the unit game of the predetermined unit game number, the notified game number addition means is used by the end of the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. The addition of the number of additional unit games of the notified game may be determined so that the total number of the additional unit games of the notified game to be cumulatively added is equal to or greater than the specified number.

Further, in order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Notification means including a display screen for displaying information giving an advantageous state to the player, and
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which a notification game in which notification is performed by the notification means can be executed, and
In the notified game state, for each unit game for at least a period of a predetermined number of unit games, the number of additional unit games of the notified game is calculated based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A determinable additional game can be executed, the number of additional unit games of the additional game can be determined for each unit game in the additional game, and the additional game is performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state. The additional game execution means to be executed and
The display screen of the notification means is provided with a display effect executing means for performing a predetermined display.
In the unit game of the additional game, the display effect executing means determines the specified internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, and the number of additional unit games of the notified game determined by the additional game executing means. If is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the predetermined display is performed in the same number as the value obtained by dividing the determined number of additional unit games of the notified game by a positive divisor of the number of additional unit games. A featured game machine.

Further, in the fifth game machine of the present invention, the additional game execution means is
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period of the notified game state, the notified game that determines whether or not to start the next game period of the notified game state after the end of the current game period of the notified game state. Continuation decision means and
The additional game execution means includes a notification game number addition means that cumulatively adds the addition unit game number of the notification game determined for each unit game over the game period of the addition game.
For each unit game of the additional game, there is an additional game adding means capable of determining the number of additional unit games of the additional game based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state, the number of added unit games of the notified game cumulatively added by the notified game number adding means over a period of at least the predetermined unit number of games. The total number is determined as the initial unit number of games of the notification game to be performed after the end of the additional game.
In the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notification game state, the notification cumulatively added by the notification game number adding means by the end of the unit game one before the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. If the total number of the additional unit games of the game is less than the specified number, in the unit game of the predetermined unit game number, the notified game number addition means is used by the end of the unit game of the predetermined unit game number. It is determined to add the number of addition unit games of the notification game so that the total number of the addition unit games of the notification game to be cumulatively added is equal to or more than the specified number.
The display effect executing means
A plurality of display column images corresponding to the plurality of display columns are displayed on the display screen of the notification means, and a plurality of types of symbol images are variably displayed in each display column image, and the symbols in the plurality of display columns are displayed. When all were stopped, a combination of symbol images corresponding to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective line set over the plurality of display columns was set over the plurality of display column images. Stop and display on at least one effective line for production among multiple effective lines for production.
In the unit game of the additional game, the specified internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the number of additional unit games of the notified game determined by the additional game executing means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. In some cases, the combination of the symbol images corresponding to the combination of the symbols related to the specified internal winning combination displayed stopped on the effective line is added to the determined addition unit of the notification game, and the addition unit is the number of games. The stop display may be made on the same number of effective lines for effect as the value when the number of games is divided by a positive divisor.

According to the third to fifth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the mode of determining the period of the gaming state which is advantageous for the player such as ART and AT.

[Game lock function]
Conventionally, a game machine having a lock function for invalidating or delaying a game operation by a player for a predetermined period at the start of a unit game has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-305183). In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-305183, the lock is performed at the time of winning a bonus during the RT gaming state or at predetermined game number intervals. With such a configuration of the lock function, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the bonus winning by generating the lock, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the RT game state.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine having a lock function is known. However, in the technique described in JP-A-2006-305183, since the lock is generated at predetermined game number intervals, the lock generation mode may be simplified and the player's interest in the lock function may be reduced. ..

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned third problem, and a third object of the present invention is a game in which the mode of generating a lock can be made more diverse and the player's interest in the lock function can be enhanced. To provide an opportunity.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the notification game determining means capable of determining the transition to the notification game state in which the notification game in which the notification by the notification means is performed can be executed, and the notification game determining means.
Lock execution that generates a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period in the unit game in which the number of times that the predetermined internal winning combination related to the re-game is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times. Means and
When the number of times a predetermined internal winning combination related to the replay is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches a predetermined number of times, the occurrence frequency of the lock by the lock executing means is different from each other in a plurality of types of lock modes. A first lock mode update means for determining one lock mode from among them and updating the lock mode currently set in the determined lock mode is provided.
When the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times, the probability that the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state is the internal winning combination. When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the combination determining means and the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined is less than the specified number of times, the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state. A game machine characterized by a higher probability than the above.

Further, in the sixth gaming machine of the present invention, when a specified internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, one lock mode is determined from the plurality of types of lock modes. , A second lock mode update means for updating the currently set lock mode in the determined lock mode may be provided.

Further, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Lock execution that generates a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period in the unit game in which the number of times that the predetermined internal winning combination related to the re-game is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times. Means and
Notification means including a display screen for displaying information giving an advantageous state to the player, and
A display effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect using the display screen of the notification means is provided.
The display effect executing means
During the predetermined period during which the lock by the lock executing means is generated, a predetermined display corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is performed on the display screen, and then a specific display corresponding to the specific internal winning combination is performed. A game machine characterized by displaying.

Further, in the seventh gaming machine of the present invention, a notification game state in which a notification game in which notification is performed by the notification means can be executed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Equipped with a notification game determination means that can determine the transition to
When the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times, the probability that the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state is the internal winning combination. When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the combination determining means and the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined is less than the specified number of times, the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state. Higher than the probability of
The display effect executing means displays a plurality of display column images corresponding to the plurality of display columns on the display screen, displays a plurality of types of symbol images in each display column image in a variable manner, and uses the lock executing means. During the predetermined period in which the lock is generated, the variable display and the stop display of the plurality of display column images may be alternately and repeatedly executed.

Further, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Lock execution that generates a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period in the unit game in which the number of times that the predetermined internal winning combination related to the re-game is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times. Means and
Notification means including a display screen for displaying information giving an advantageous state to the player, and
A display effect executing means for displaying on the display screen of the notification means corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the notification game determining means capable of determining the transition to the notification game state in which the notification game in which the notification by the notification means is performed can be executed is provided. ,
The display effect executing means
During the predetermined period during which the lock by the lock executing means is generated, a predetermined display corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is performed on the display screen, and then a specific display corresponding to the specific internal winning combination is performed. Display and
When the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times, the probability that the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state is the specific probability. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability is according to the internal winning combination and is higher than the probability according to the predetermined internal winning combination.

Further, in the eighth game machine of the present invention, the display effect executing means displays a plurality of display column images corresponding to the plurality of display columns on the display screen, and a plurality of types in each display column image. The symbol image of the above may be displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display and the stop display of the plurality of display column images may be alternately and repeatedly executed during the predetermined period in which the lock is generated by the lock executing means. ..

Further, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a ninth game machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Lock execution that generates a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period in the unit game in which the number of times that the predetermined internal winning combination related to the re-game is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times. Means and
When the number of times a predetermined internal winning combination related to the replay is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches a predetermined number of times, the occurrence frequency of the lock by the lock executing means is different from each other in a plurality of types of lock modes. The first lock mode update means for determining one lock mode from among them and updating the lock mode currently set in the determined lock mode, and
When the specified internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, one lock mode is determined from the plurality of types of lock modes, and the lock mode currently set in the determined lock mode is set. A second lock mode update means to update,
When the lock mode is updated by the first lock mode updating means or the second lock mode updating means, the number of times that the predetermined internal winning combination related to the re-game is determined by the internal winning combination determining means A specified number of times updating means for resetting the specified number of times based on the updated lock mode even before the currently set specified number of times is reached.
A game machine equipped with.

Further, in the ninth game machine of the present invention, further
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the notification game determining means capable of determining the transition to the notification game state in which the notification game in which the notification by the notification means is performed can be executed is provided. When the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means reaches the specified number of times, the probability that the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state is the internal winning combination. When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the combination determining means and the number of times the predetermined internal winning combination is determined is less than the specified number of times, the notification game determining means determines the transition to the notified game state. It may be higher than the probability of

According to the sixth to ninth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to make the locking generation mode more diverse and enhance the player's interest in the locking function.

[Notification function at the start of ART]
Conventionally, pachislot machines having an assist replay time (ART) function in which AT and RT operate at the same time have been developed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39429). Then, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39429, when the transition to ART (pseudo-bonus) is decided, the ART game is started after the game in the ART preparing state.

As described above, conventionally, when a transition to a gaming state advantageous to a player (for example, ART, etc.) is determined, a gaming machine is known in which a game in an advantageous gaming state is started after the preparatory state. .. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for the development of a technique for appropriately notifying the start of a game in an advantageous gaming state in a gaming machine having such a function.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is a game having a function of starting a game in an advantageous gaming state through a game in a prepared state. It is to provide a technique capable of appropriately notifying the start of a game in an advantageous game state in the machine.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Notification means for notifying information about the game,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game in which information that gives a player an advantageous state is notified by the notification means, and
When the transition to the notification game is determined by the notification game determining means, the transition control means for shifting the game state to the transition preparation state to the notification game, and
In the transition preparation state, the correct answer number counting means for counting the number of times the stop operation is performed according to the information of the stop operation related to the winning of the predetermined combination, which is notified by the notification means and wins the predetermined combination.
After the number of times counted by the correct answer number counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, when the predetermined combination is won next, in the unit game, after all the variable display of the display column is stopped, the player A lock execution means that generates a lock that invalidates the game operation for a predetermined period of time,
After the number of times counted by the correct answer number counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, in the unit game in which the predetermined combination is won, the effect of notifying the information indicating the start of the notified game is performed by the notification means. Means and
After the number of times counted by the correct answer number counting means reaches the predetermined number of times, when the predetermined combination is won next time, the internal winning combination determining means is provided with an external signal indicating the start of the notification game. A game machine provided with an external signal output means for outputting to an external centralized terminal board provided outside the main board.

Further, in the tenth gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined winning combination is an internal winning combination related to the re-game.
After the number of times counted by the correct answer number counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the effect executing means may perform the plurality of times before the lock is generated by the lock executing means in the unit game in which the predetermined combination is won. In conjunction with the stop operation of the display row of the above, a plurality of predetermined decorative symbols indicating the start of the notification game may be displayed side by side on the display screen provided in the notification means.

According to the tenth game machine of the present invention having the above configuration, in a game machine having a function of starting a game (notification game) in a game state advantageous to the player through a game in the preparation state (transition preparation state). , It is possible to appropriately notify the start of a game in an advantageous game state.

[Hidden lottery function when deciding to continue ART]
Conventionally, among game machines having an AT function, a game machine capable of stocking an AT during an AT game period is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-165945). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-165945, when AT is stocked during the AT gaming period, the non-AT gaming is digested for a predetermined period after the gaming period of the currently operating AT ends, and then , The game of the stocked AT is started. That is, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-165945, when AT is stocked during the AT gaming period, after the end of the gaming period of the currently operating AT, a so-called "incubation period" is passed, and then again. The AT game is started. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-165945, the number of unit games during this incubation period is determined by lottery.

As described above, conventionally, there are known game machines that provide a non-AT incubation period between AT sets when the AT set is continued. However, in a configuration in which the game during the non-AT incubation period is always digested each time the AT set is continued, the player has an increased chance of wasting medals. There is a risk of reducing the interest in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to provide a player with a gaming machine capable of setting a non-AT incubation period between AT sets. This is to suppress the increase in the chances of wasting medals and prevent the player's interest in the game from diminishing.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Notification means for notifying information about the game,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game in which information that gives a player an advantageous state is notified by the notification means, and
During the game period of the notification game, a notification game continuation determination means for determining whether or not to start the notification game again after the end of the game period of the notification game, and
A continuous continuation number counting means that counts the number of times that the announced game continuation determination means continuously determines to start the notified game again,
When it is determined by the notification game continuation determination means to start the notification game again after the end of the game period of the notification game, between the end of the game period of the notification game and the start of the next notification game. In addition, the non-notifying game determining means capable of determining whether or not to perform a non-notifying game in which the notification of information giving a favorable state to the player is not executed by the notification means for a predetermined unit number of games is provided.
In the unit game in which the notification game continuation determination means determines to start the notification game again, when the number of times counted by the continuous continuation number counting means reaches a predetermined number, the non-notification game A gaming machine characterized in that it does not perform a determination process of whether or not to perform the non-notification game by a determination means.

Further, in the eleventh gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined by the non-notifying game determining means to perform the non-notifying game, the predetermined unit is selected from a plurality of types of unit games. A non-notifying game period determining means for determining the number of games may be provided.

Further, in the eleventh game machine of the present invention, the number of times counted by the continuous continuation number counting means in the unit game determined to start the notified game again by the notified game continuation determining means. When the predetermined number of times is reached, a specific notification game in which a predetermined effect is executed in a predetermined specific period is executed after the end of the game period of the notification game, and after the end of the specific notification game, the specific notification game is executed. The next notification game determined by the notification game continuation determination means may be started.

Further, in the eleventh game machine of the present invention, after the execution of the non-notified game is determined by the non-notified game determining means, the notified game is determined by the notified game continuation determining means during the game period of the notified game. If it is decided to start the notified game again after the end of the game period of the above, the execution of the non-notified game may be invalidated.

According to the eleventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, even if the gaming machine can set the incubation period of the non-notifying game (non-AT) between the sets of the notified game (AT), a medal is given to the player. It is possible to suppress an increase in opportunities for wasteful consumption, and it is possible to prevent a player from losing interest in the game.

[Release function of benefits acquired at the ending ART]
Conventionally, a game machine having an assist replay time (ART) function in which AT and RT operate at the same time has been developed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39429). Then, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39429, during the ART game period, an additional lottery for the unit game number (number of games) of the ART is performed by lottery, and when the additional lottery is won, the winning ART additional game A technique for adding a number to the number of currently remaining ART games is disclosed.

As described above, in a gaming machine equipped with an ART function, when it is decided to acquire a privilege (additional number of ART games) in a unit game during the ART game period, the privilege determined in the unit game is given (released). ) Technology has been proposed. By the way, in a game machine provided with such a privilege giving function, it is required to develop a technique capable of appropriately changing the release timing of the privilege according to, for example, the content of the production during the ART game period.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned sixth problem, and a sixth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately changing the release timing of benefits according to, for example, the content of production. It is to be.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Notification means for notifying information about the game,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game in which information that gives a player an advantageous state is notified by the notification means, and
During the game period of the notification game, a notification game continuation determination means for determining whether or not to start the notification game again after the end of the game period of the notification game, and
A privilege determining means capable of determining whether or not a privilege is granted during the game period of the notification game,
When the privilege granting decision is made by the privilege determining means, the privilege granting means capable of executing the privilege granting process in the unit game in which the privilege granting decision is made is provided.
In the notified game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, when it is determined by the notified game continuation determining means to start the notified game again, a predetermined specific period is determined after the end of the game period of the notified game. A specific notification game in which a predetermined effect is executed is executed, and after the end of the specific notification game, the next notification game determined by the notification game continuation determination means is started.
In the specific notification game, when the privilege determination means decides to grant the privilege, the privilege granting process for which the decision is made by the privilege granting means is performed within the game period of the next notification game. A game machine characterized in that it is performed at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention, in the gaming state of the notified game, it is further determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each unit game for at least a period of a predetermined number of unit games. Based on the internal winning combination, it is possible to execute an additional game in which the number of additional unit games of the notified game can be determined, and in the additional game, the number of additional unit games of the additional game can be determined for each unit game. Further, at the start of the game period of the notified game, the additional game execution means for always executing the additional game is provided.
The total number of the additional unit games of the notified game cumulatively added over the game period of the additional game performed at the start of the game period of the notified game is the initial unit of the notified game performed after the end of the additional game. Determined as the number of games
The privilege for which the privilege granting means determines the grant during the game period of the notified game includes the addition of the unit number of games of the notified game.
In the specific notification game, when the privilege determination means decides to grant the privilege, at a specific timing within the final unit game of the game period of the next notification game or after the end of the final unit game. , The privilege that is determined to be granted during the game period of the specific notification game may be notified.

According to the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the release timing of the privilege can be appropriately changed according to, for example, the content of the effect.

[Continuous hit production]
Conventionally, a gaming machine having an assist replay time (ART) function in which AT and RT operate at the same time has been developed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-922902). Then, in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92202, during the ART game period, an additional lottery of the unit game number (number of games) of the ART is performed, and when the additional lottery is won, the game to the touch sensor module A directing function is provided to notify the additional game of ART by the touch operation of the person.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine having an effect function of notifying the number of additional games of ART by touching the touch sensor module of the player is known. By the way, in the notification effect of the number of additional games accompanied by such a predetermined operation of the player, there is a demand for the development of an effect capable of further enhancing the interest of the player with respect to the effect.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, and a seventh object of the present invention is to provide a notification effect of privilege acquisition accompanied by a predetermined operation of the player, and the player's interest in the effect. It is to provide a game machine having a production function capable of further enhancing.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
Notification means for notifying information about the game,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game in which information that gives a player an advantageous state is notified by the notification means, and
A notification extension determination means capable of determining an extension game period of the notification game during the game period of the notification game,
When the extended game period of the notified game is determined by the notified extension determining means and a specific condition is satisfied, the information regarding the extended game period of the notified game is linked to the continuous predetermined operation of the player. , A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect displayed on the notification screen provided in the notification means.
The specific effect executing means is
The data of the extension period display number displayed on the notification screen each time the player executes the predetermined operation, and the data of the extension mode image corresponding to the data of the extension period display number, and the predetermined operation The extension period display for each execution of the predetermined operation so that the cumulative addition number of the extension period display number when the predetermined number of times is performed becomes the extension game period of the notification game determined by the notification extension determination means. With reference to the effect pattern data of the specific effect in which the number of data is set, the extension period display number and the extension mode image are displayed on the notification screen for each execution of the predetermined operation of the player. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is terminated when the predetermined operation is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the data of the extension mode image includes information for specifying the display position of the extension mode image on the notification screen.
The effect pattern data of the specific effect may include end determination data for determining the end of the specific effect.

Further, in the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the effect pattern data of the specific effect is displayed on the notification screen for each execution of the predetermined operation, and the extension period until the execution of the predetermined operation is displayed. The data of the cumulative addition number image corresponding to the cumulative addition number of the number may be included.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the notification effect of the acquisition of the privilege accompanied by the predetermined operation of the player.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 11a ... LCD screen, 19L ... Left stop button, 19C ... Middle stop button, 19R ... Right stop button, 21 ... MAX bet button, 23 ... Start lever, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 86 ... Rom cartridge board , 91 ... main control circuit, 93 ... main CPU, 94 ... main ROM, 95 ... main RAM, 101 ... sub control circuit, 102 ... sub CPU, 103 ... sub RAM, 110L ... left liquid crystal sub reel, 110C ... middle liquid crystal sub reel, 110R ... Right LCD sub reel

Claims (2)

Notification means for notifying information about the game,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game in which notification by the notification means is executed is provided.
When the transition to the next notification game is determined by the notification game determining means and the notification game is performed a plurality of times, information advantageous to the player is not notified between the current notification game and the next notification game. Unannounced games are feasible and
A specific notification game is provided to execute a predetermined effect over a specific period,
The specific notification game ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied without extending the specific notification game.
When it is decided to execute the specific notified game, the non-notified game is not executed until the specific notified game is completed.
A special game is provided, which is a game different from the above-mentioned notification game and is advantageous for the player.
During said special game, Ri extension determinable der gaming period of the special game,
A plurality of modes in the special game are provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the internal winning combination that can determine both the gaming period of the notified game and the extension of the gaming period of the special game is different depending on the mode. The plurality of modes include a predetermined mode in which the probability that the extension of the game period of the special game is determined is relatively high.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein when an extension of the gaming period of the special game is decided in the predetermined mode, a privilege of a long extension period can be granted.

Images